kia, the company
Congratulations! Your selection of a Kia was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure. Now that you are the
owner of a Kia vehicle, you’ll probably be asked a lot of ques-
tions about your vehicle and the company like “What is a Kia?”,
“Who is Kia?”, “What does ‘Kia’ mean?”.
Here are some answers. First, Kia is the oldest car company in
Korea. It is a company that has thousands of employees focused
on building high-quality vehicles at affordable prices.
The first syllable, Ki, in the word “Kia” means “to arise from to
the world” or “to come up out of to the world.” The second syl-
lable, a, means “Asia.” So, the word Kia, means “to arise from”
or “to come up out of Asia to the world.”
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained
technicians, recommended special tools, genuine Kia
replacement parts and is dedicated to your complete sat-
isfaction.
Because subsequent owners require this important infor-
mation as well, this publication should remain with the
vehicle if it is sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information
manual that provides important information on all war-
ranties regarding your vehicle. We urge you to read these
publications carefully and follow the recommendations to
help assure enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehi-
cle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and fea-
tures for its various models.
Therefore, the equipment described in this manual, along
with the various illustrations, may not all be applicable to
your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this man-
ual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the
right to discontinue or change specifications or design at
any time without notice and without incurring any obli-
gation. If you have questions, always check with your
Kia Dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motor-
ing pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2007 Kia Motors Corp.
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, elec-
tronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording,
or by any information storage and retrieval system or
translation in whole or part is not permitted without writ-
ten authorization from Kia Motors Corporation.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
Your vehicle at a glance
Knowing your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
Driving tips
In case of an emergency
Maintenance
Specifications
Index
table of contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
How to use this manual / 1-2
Vehicle break-in process / 1-3
Introduction
Introduction
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. At the very least, you
must read the WARNING and CAU-
TION sections spread throughout the
manual, which are easily recognized
by their special markings. These sec-
tions have precautions that must be
followed to prevent personal injury or
death.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you learn about features,
important safety information, and
driving tips under various road condi-
tions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents. A
good place to start is the index; it has
an alphabetical listing of all informa-
tion in your manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You’ll find various WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s, and NOTICE’s in this
manual. These WARNING’s,
CAUTION’s and NOTICE’s were pre-
pared to enhance your personal
safety and continued satisfaction
with Kia vehicle. You should carefully
read and follow ALL procedures and
recommendations provided in these
WARNING’s, CAUTION’s and
NOTICE’s.
✽
NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provid-
ed.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation
in which harm, serious bodily
injury or death could result if the
warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
PROCESS
No special break-in period is need-
ed. By following a few simple precau-
tions for the first 1,000 km (600
miles) you may add to the perform-
ance, economy and life of your vehi-
cle.
• Do not race the engine.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
• Avoid full-throttle starts.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Interior overview / 2-2
Instrument panel overview / 2-3
Engine compartment / 2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
Your vehicle at a glance
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button
2. Outside rearview mirror control switch*
3. Power window switches*
4. Master power door lock control*
5. Master power window control lock*
6. Vent controls
7. Instrument cluster
8. Steering wheel
9. Steering wheel tilt*
10. Trunk release button
11. Instrument panel illumination*
12. TCS button*
13. Hood release lever
14. Brake pedal
15. Accelerator pedal
16. Fuel filler lid release lever
* : if equipped
OLD006002N
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Your vehicle at a glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Driver’s Air bag*
2. Light control / Turn signals
3. Instrument cluster
4. Wiper/Washer
5. Ignition switch
6. Aux
7. Hazard
8. Climate control system
9. Shift lever*
10. Passenger’s air bag*
11. Glove box
12. Audio controls*
13. Auto cruise controls*
* : if equipped
OLD006003N
Your vehicle at a glance
42
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OLD058002
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Engine coolant reservoir
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
* : if equipped
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Keys / 3-2
Remote keyless entry / 3-3
Immobilizer system / 3-6
Door locks / 3-8
Windows / 3-13
Seat / 3-16
Safety belts / 3-27
Air bag - Advanced supplemental restraint
system / 3-50
Trunk / 3-76
Hood / 3-78
Fuel filler lid / 3-80
Mirrors / 3-83
Interior lights / 3-87
Storage compartment / 3-88
Interior features / 3-90
Sunroof / 3-94
Luggage net / 3-97
Antenna / 3-98
Audio system / 3-99
Knowing your vehicle
Knowing your vehicle
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The key code number is stamped on
the plate attached to the key set.
Should you lose your keys, this num-
ber will enable an authorized Kia
Dealer to duplicate the keys easily.
Remove the plate and store it in a
safe place. Also, record the code
number and keep it in a safe and
handy place, but not in the vehicle.
Key operations
Master key
Used to start the engine, lock and
unlock the doors, and open the trunk
(if equipped).
KEYS
OUN046100L
OUN026060
WARNING - Ignition key
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the ignition key is
dangerous even if the key is not
in the ignition. Children copy
adults and they could place the
key in the ignition. The ignition
key would enable children to
operate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even
death. Never leave the keys in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children.
WARNING
Use only Kia original parts for
the ignition key in your vehicle.
If an aftermarket key is used, the
ignition switch may not return
to ON after START. If this hap-
pens, the starter will continue to
operate causing damage to the
starter motor and possible fire
due to excessive current in the
wiring.
33
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
(1) Lock button
(2) Unlock button
(3) Panic button
(4) Trunk lid open button
Lock (1)
All doors are locked and the hazard
lamp flash once if the lock button is
pressed.
Unlock (2)
Driver’s door is unlocked and the
hazard lamp will flash twice if the
unlock button is pressed once. All
doors are unlocked if the unlock but-
ton is pressed twice within 4 sec-
onds.
After depressing this button, the
doors will be locked automatically
unless you open them within 30 sec-
onds.
Panic (3) (if equipped)
The horn sounds and hazard lamp
will flash for about 27 seconds if this
button is pressed for more than 0.5
seconds.
To stop the panic operation, press
any button except panic on the trans-
mitter.
Trunk lid open (4) (if equipped)
The trunk lid opens if this button is
pressed for more than 0.5 seconds.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
OLD026001
Type A
Type B
OLD026002
Knowing your vehicle
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
✽
NOTICE
The transmitter will not work if any
of following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition
switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 30 m [100 feet]).
- The battery in the transmitter is
weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the
transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the ignition key. If you have a
problem with the transmitter, con-
tact an authorized Kia Dealer.
Operational distance may vary
depending upon the area the trans-
mitter is used in. For example, if the
vehicle is parked near police sta-
tions, government and public offices,
broadcasting stations, military instal-
lations, airports, or transmitting tow-
ers, etc.
This device complies with
Industry Canada Standard RSS-
210. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
Keep the transmitter away from
water or any liquid. If the key-
less entry system is inoperative
due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by
your manufacturer vehicle war-
ranty.
35
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Battery replacement
Transmitter uses a 3 volt lithium bat-
tery which will normally last for sever-
al years. When replacement is neces-
sary, use the following procedure.
1. Insert a slim tool into the slot and
gently pry open the transmitter
center cover.
2. Replace the battery with new one.
When replacing the battery, make
sure the battery positive “+” sym-
bol faces up as indicated in the
illustration.
3. Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
For replacement transmitters, see an
Authorized Kia Dealer for reprogram-
ming.
CAUTION
•Using the wrong battery can
cause the transmitter to mal-
function. Be sure to use the
correct battery.
• To avoid damaging the trans-
mitter, don't drop it, get it wet,
or expose it to heat or sun-
light.
CAUTION
The keyless entry system trans-
mitter is designed to give you
years of troublefree use, howev-
er it can malfunction if exposed
to moisture or static electricity.
If you are unsure how to use
your transmitter or replace the
battery, contact an authorized
Kia dealer.
OMG035137 HNF2005
Knowing your vehicle
63
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
prised of a small transponder in the
ignition key, and antenna coil in the
key cylinder and Immobilizer unit in
the instrument panel.
With this system, whenever you
insert your ignition key into the igni-
tion switch and turn it to ON, the
antenna coil in the ignition switch
receives a signal from the transpon-
der in the ignition key and then sends
the signal to the Immobilizer unit.
The Immobilizer unit checks the sig-
nal and determines whether the igni-
tion key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Insert the ignition key into the key
cylinder and turn it to the ON posi-
tion.
To activate the immobilizer sys-
tem:
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi-
tion. The immobilizer system acti-
vates automatically. Without a valid
ignition key for your vehicle, the
engine will not start.
✽
NOTICE
When starting the engine, do not use
the key with other immobilizer keys
around. Otherwise the engine may
not start or may stop soon after it
starts. Keep each key separately not
to have any malfunction after you
receive your new vehicle.
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OHD046100
CAUTION
Do not put metal accessories
near the key or ignition key.
The engine may not start for the
metal accessories may interrupt
the transponder signal from
normally transmitting.
WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
Immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and
should be kept confidential. Do
not leave this number anywhere
in your vehicle.
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
This device complies with
Industry Canada Standard RSS-
210. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference, including interference that
may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Limp home (override) proce-
dure
When you turn the ignition key to the
ON position, if the IMMO indicator
remains on continuously after blink-
ing 6 times, your transponder
equipped in the ignition key is out of
order. You cannot start the engine
without the lime home procedure. To
start the engine, you have to input
your password by using the ignition
switch.
The following procedure is how to
input your password of “2345” as an
example.
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON posi-
tion. The IMMO indicator ( ) will
blink 6 times and remain on indicat-
ing the beginning of the limp home
procedure.
2. Turn the ignition key to the ACC
position.
3. To enter the first digit (in this
example “2”), turn the ignition key
to the ON and ACC position twice.
Perform the same procedure for
the next digits between 3 seconds
and 10 seconds (for example, for
“3”, turn the ignition ON and ACC
3 times).
4. If all of the digits have been input
successfully, you have to start the
engine within 10 seconds. If you
attempt to start the engine after 10
seconds, the engine will not start
and you will have to input your
password again.
After performing the limp home pro-
cedure, you have to see an author-
ized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
or immobilizer system.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
If you cannot start your engine
in spite of limp home procedure,
have your vehicle towed by an
authorized Kia dealer for
inspection and necessary
repairs.
Knowing your vehicle
83
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
• Turn the key toward rear of vehicle
to unlock and toward front of vehi-
cle to lock.
• Turn the key to the right once to
unlock the driver’s door and to the
right twice within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors. (if equipped)
• Turn the key to the left once to
unlock the passenger’s door and to
the left twice within 4 seconds to
unlock all doors. (if equipped)
• Doors can also be locked and
unlocked with the transmitter key.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by the hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
❈ If your vehicle is equipped with the
remote keyless entry system,
there is no key lock on the front
passenger's door.
1LDA2004
Lock
Unlock
CAUTION
The transponder in your ignition
key is an important part of the
immobilizer system. It is
designed to give years of trou-
ble free service, however you
should avoid exposure to mois-
ture, static electricity and rough
handling. Immobilizer system
malfunction could occur.
CAUTION
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction and
should only be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Malfunctions caused by improp-
er alterations, adjustments or
modifications to the immobilizer
system are not covered by your
vehicle manufacturer warranty.
DOOR LOCKS
39
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
To lock a door without the key, push
the inside door lock button (1) or
door lock switch (2, if equipped) to
the “LOCK” position and close the
door (3).
✽
NOTICE
If the door is locked/unlocked multi-
ple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on button will
be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
1LDA2006
Lock
Unlock
OLD036900N
WARNING
Always remove the ignition key,
engage the parking brake, close
all windows and lock all doors
when leaving your vehicle unat-
tended.
Knowing your vehicle
103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• If the inner door handle of driver’s
(front passenger’s, if equipped)
door is pulled when the door lock
button is in lock position, the button
is unlocked and door opens.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
ignition key is in the ignition switch
and door is open.
• If you lock the front door with door
lock button, all vehicle doors will
lock automatically. (if equipped)
With central door lock switch
(if equipped)
It is operated by depressing the door
lock switch. If any door is open when
the switch is depressed, the door will
remain locked when closed.
• When pushing down on the front
portion (1) of the central door lock
switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
• When pushing down on the rear
portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle
doors will unlock.
• However, if the key is in the ignition
switch and any front door is open,
the doors will not lock when the
front portion of central door lock
switch is pressed.
1LDA2007
1LDN2007
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side (if equipped)
311
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Rear door child safety lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children from acciden-
tally opening the rear doors from
inside the vehicle. The rear door
safety locks should be used whenev-
er children are in the vehicle.
1LDA2008
WARNING - Unlocked
vehicle
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
can invite theft or possible harm
to you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle while you
are gone. Always remove the
ignition key, engage the parking
brake, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving your
vehicle unattended.
WARNING - Unattended
children
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
Furthermore, children might
operate features of the vehicle
that could injure them, or they
could encounter other harm,
possibly from someone gaining
entry to the vehicle. Never leave
children or animals unattended
in your vehicle.
WARNING
• The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion to pre-
vent accidental opening of the
door. Locked doors will also
discourage potential intruders
when the vehicle stops or
slows.
• Be careful when opening
doors and watch for vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles or
pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.
Opening a door when some-
thing is approaching can
cause damage or injury.
Knowing your vehicle
123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Open the rear door.
2. Push the child safety lock located
on the rear edge of the door to the
“lock” position. When the child
safety lock is in the “lock ( )”
position, rear door will not open
when the inner door handle is
pulled inside the vehicle.
3. Close the rear door.
4. To open the rear door, pull the out-
side door handle.
Even though the doors may be
unlocked, the rear door will not open
by pulling the inner door handle (1)
until rear door child safety lock is
unlocked ( ).
Rear hatch (if equipped)
Opening the rear hatch
• Rear hatch is locked or unlocked
with a key.
• To open the rear hatch, insert the
key into the lock, turn it to the
unlock position (1) and pull up the
rear hatch by pressing the handle
(2).
• You can also lock/unlock the latch
(but not release it) with the central
door lock system (if equipped).
• If unlocked, the rear hatch can be
opened by pressing the handle (2)
and pulling the hatch up.
WARNING - Rear door
locks
If children accidentally open the
rear doors while the vehicle is in
motion, they could fall out and
be severely injured or killed. To
prevent children from opening
the rear doors from the inside,
the rear door safety locks
should be used whenever chil-
dren are in the vehicle.
1LDA3205
Lock
Unlock
313
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Power windows (if equipped)
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down*
(Driver’s window)
(7) Power window lock switch
*: if equipped
WINDOWS
OLD026010
Knowing your vehicle
143
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to oper-
ate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door’s win-
dow. However, the driver has a power
window lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 sec-
onds after the ignition key removal.
While driving, if you notice buffeting
and pulsation (wind shock) with
either side window open, you should
open the opposite window slightly to
reduce the condition.
Window opening and closing
The driver’s door has a master power
window switch that controls all the
windows in the vehicle.
To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
Auto down window (if equipped)
(Driver’s window)
Depressing the power window switch
momentarily to the second detent
position (6) completely lowers the
driver’s window even when the
switch is released. To stop the win-
dow at the desired position while the
window is in operation, pull up the
switch momentarily to the opposite
direction of the window movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
OUN026011OUN026012
315
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
2. Close driver’s window and contin-
ue pulling up on driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 sec-
ond after the window is complete-
ly closed.
Power window lock switch
• The driver can disable the power
window switches on a passenger
door by depressing the power win-
dow lock switch located on the dri-
ver’s door to LOCK (pressed).
• When the power window lock
switch is ON, the driver’s master
control cannot operate the passen-
ger door power windows either.
Manual windows (if equipped)
Use the window crank to open and
close each window.
3FDA2015
OLD026013
CAUTION
To prevent the power window
system from the possibility of
damage, do not open or close
two windows at the same time.
This will also ensure the
longevity of the fuse.
WARNING
• Make sure heads and hands
are safely out of the way before
closing a window.
• Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK posi-
tion (depressed). Serious injury
can result from unintentional
window operation by the child.
• Do not extend face or arms out-
side through the window open-
ing while driving.
•Always double check to make
sure all arms, hands and other
obstructions are safely out of
the way before closing a win-
dow.
Knowing your vehicle
163
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height
(4) Headrest adjustment
Front passenger seat
(5) Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward
(6) Seatback recliner
(7) Headrest adjustment
Rear seat
(8) Split folding rear seat*
(9) Headrest adjustment
* : if equipped
SEAT
1LDN2026
• Type A • Type B
317
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING - Objects on
floor
Loose objects in the driver’s
foot area could interfere with
the operation of the foot pedals,
possibly causing an accident.
Do not place anything under the
front seats.
WARNING - Seating posi-
tion
• Never attempt to adjust seat
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of
control, and an accident caus-
ing death or serious injury.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in serious or fatal
injury in a sudden stop or col-
lision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Always drive and ride with
your seatback upright and the
lap portion of the safety belt,
is snug and low across the
hips. This puts your safety
belts in the best position to
protect you in case of an acci-
dent.
• In order to avoid unnecessary
airbag injuries including the
possibility of severe injury or
death, always sit as far back
as possible from the steering
wheel so that your chest is
away at least 250 mm (10 inch-
es) away from the steering
wheel.
Knowing your vehicle
183
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driver’s seat adjustment
Adjusting the seat forward and
backward
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever under the front edge of the
seat cushion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and
backward without using the lever. If
the seat moves, it is not locked prop-
erly.
Adjusting height of driver seat
cushion (if equipped)
Pivoting the lever upward to raise the
seat cushion.
Pivoting the lever downward to lower
the seat cushion.
1LDA2027
1LDA2028
319
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Adjusting the driver’s seatback
recliner
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on
the seatback recline lever located
on the outside of the seat, toward
the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the back of the seat to
the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
1LDA2029
WARNING
Driving or riding in a vehicle
with a front seatback reclined
could lead to serious or fatal
injury in an accident. If a front
seat is reclined during an acci-
dent, the occupant’s hips may
slide under the lap portion of
the safety belt applying great
force to the unprotected
abdomen. Serious or fatal inter-
nal injuries could result. The
driver must advise the front pas-
senger to keep the seatbacks in
comfortably upright position
whenever the vehicle is in
motion.
Knowing your vehicle
203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and passengers,
but also helps to protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
1
). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (
2
) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (
3
). For best protection,
adjust the headrest so its center is as
high as your ears.
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (
1
) while pulling
upward (
2
).
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to
move forward and upward during a
rear impact. This helps to prevent the
driver's and front passenger’s head
from moving backward and thus
helps prevent neck injuries.
1LDA2033 1LDA2034
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and
neck injuries, do not drive the
vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly posi-
tioned.
Do not adjust the driver’s head-
rest while driving.
HNF2041-1
321
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Adjusting the front passenger
seat
Forward/backward position
adjustment
To move the seat forward or back-
ward:
1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
lever under the front edge of the
seat cushion up and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked secure-
ly by trying to move forward and
backward without using the lever. If
the seat moves, it is not locked prop-
erly.
Adjusting seatback recliner
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up on
the seatback recline lever located
on the outside of the seat, toward
the rear.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the back of the seat to
the position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
1LDA2035
WARNING
In order to avoid unnecessary
air bag injuries including the
possibility of severe injury or
death, always sit as far back as
possible by moving the seat far
back, while still maintaining
good vehicle control. Serious
injury or death may be caused
due to the deployment of the
passenger’s air bag.
1LDA2036
Knowing your vehicle
223
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and passengers,
but also helps to protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
1
). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (
2
) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (
3
). For best protection,
adjust the headrest so its center is as
high as your ears.
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (
1
) while pulling
upward (
2
).
WARNING - Driver
responsibility for front seat
passenger
Driving or riding in a vehicle
with a front seatback reclined
could lead to serious or fatal
injury in an accident. If a front
seat is reclined, the occupant’s
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the safety belt apply-
ing great force to the unprotect-
ed abdomen. Serious or fatal
internal injuries could result.
Keep the seatbacks in a com-
fortably upright position when-
ever the vehicle is in motion.
1LDA2033A 1LDA2034A
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and
neck injuries, do not drive the
vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly posi-
tioned.
323
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Active headrest (if equipped)
The active headrest is designed to
move forward and upward during a
rear impact. This helps to prevent the
driver's and front passenger’s head
from moving backward and thus
helps prevent neck injuries.
Rear seat
Split folding rear seat
(if equipped)
The rear seatbacks fold forward to
provide additional cargo space and
to provide access to the cargo area.
• To fold the rear seatback(s) down,
pull the lock release lever, then fold
the seatback forward and down.
• To raise the seatback, lift and push
it firmly until it clicks into place.
• When you return the seatback to
its upright position, reposition the
rear safety belts so that they can
be used by rear seat passengers.
4 Door (if equipped)
1. Pull the lock release lever.
2. Move the rear three-point seat
belts to the outside (1) so that they
don’t interfere with the seatback
when lowering.
3. Fold the seatback forward and
down firmly (2).
1LDN2038
1LDN3025
HNF2041-1
Knowing your vehicle
243
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5 Door (if equipped)
1. Lift the front of seat cushion (1) up.
2. Lift the rear of seat cushion up (
2
).
3 Move the seat cushion firmly until it
clicks (
3
).
4. Remove the headrest and put the
headrest poles into the holes on
the rear of the seat cushion (4).
5. Pull the lock release lever (5).
6. Fold the seatback forward and
down firmly (6).
1LDA2243
1LDA2244
1LDA2241
1LDA2242
1LDA2239
1LDA2240
325
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
When you fold the rear seatback or
put luggage on the rear seat cushion,
insert the buckle in the pocket
between the rear seatback and cush-
ion. Doing so can prevent the buckle
from being damaged by the rear
seatback or luggage.
To unfold the rear seat:
1. Move the rear center shoulder belt
(1) to the side so that it is clear of
the seatback.
2. Lift and push the seatback back-
ward firmly until it clicks into place
(2).
Move and push the seat cushion
downward firmly to the proper
position (5 Door, if equipped).
3. Replace the rear safty belt to the
proper position.
✽
NOTICE
If the seat belt is locked during the
seatback folding, pull out and
retract the seat belt to release it.
1LDN3026A1LDN3026B
CAUTION
• When returning the rear seat-
backs to the upright position,
remember to return the rear
shoulder belts to their proper
position.
• Do not remove the floor carpet
in your vehicle. Emission con-
trol system components
cause high exhaust tempera-
tures under the floor.
WARNING - Cargo danger
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from shift-
ing and causing injury to the
vehicle occupants.
Knowing your vehicle
263
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Headrest adjustment
Adjusting the height up and down
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and passengers,
but also helps to protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (
1
). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (
2
) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (
3
). For best protection,
adjust the headrest so its center is as
high as your ears.
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as
far as it can go then press the
release button (
1
) while pulling
upward (
2
).
1LDA2042
WARNING
To reduce the risk of head and
neck injuries, do not drive the
vehicle with the headrest
removed or improperly posi-
tioned.
1LDA2043
CAUTION - Loading pro-
cedure
Make sure the engine is off, the
transaxle is in P and the parking
brake is applied whenever load-
ing or unloading cargo. Vehicle
may move if shift lever is inad-
vertently moved to another
position.
327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver’s
and front passenger’s pre-tensioner
seat belts. The purpose of the pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
seat belts fit tightly against the occu-
pant’s body in certain frontal colli-
sions. The pre-tensioner seat belts
can be activated together with the air
bags, where the frontal collision is
severe enough.
The pre-tensioner seat belt is
installed at the front seats, and the
sensor is equipped inside the buckle,
where presence of passenger is
sensed by the fastening of the seat
belts. Therefore, pre-tensioner will
not activate if the passenger is not
fastened with the seat belts.
Likewise, it will activate if buckled
even without a passenger in the
seat. Pre-tensioner seat belt is
designed to activate when the seat-
belt is in use. To ensure the preten-
sioner seatbelts activate in event of a
possible seatbelt buckle switch mal-
function, the system is designed to
activate regardless of whether a seat
belt is in use or if no seat belt use is
detected within 6 seconds of turning
the ignition switch ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents.Their locations are shown in
the illustration.
(1)
SRS airbag warning light
(2)
Seatbelt pre-tensioner assembly
(3)
SRS airbag control module
SAFETY BELTS
2GHB3002
2GHB3001
1
2
3
Knowing your vehicle
283
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING
To obtain maximum benefit from
a pre-tensioner seat belt:
• The seat belt must be worn
correctly.
• The seat belt must be adjusted
to the correct position.
CAUTION
When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment and are not toxic.
Although, it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods.Wash your
hands and face thoroughly after
an accident in which the air
bags and/or pre-tensioner seat
belts were activated.
CAUTION
• Because the sensor that acti-
vates the SRS air bag is con-
nected with pre-tensioner seat
belt, the SRS air bag warning
light on the instrument panel
will blink or illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after
the ignition key has been
turned to the “ON” position,
then the light should go off.
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is
not working properly, this
warning light will illuminate
even if there is no malfunction
of SRS air bag system. If the
SRS air bag warning light
does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”,
or if it remains illuminated
after blinking or illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds,
or if it illuminates while the
vehicle is being driven, please
have an authorized Kia dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belt or SRS air bag system as
soon as possible.
329
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
WARNING
• Pre-tensioners are designed
to operate once. After activa-
tion, pre-tensioner seat belts
must be replaced. All seat
belts, of any type, should
always be replaced after they
have been worn during a colli-
sion.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia
dealer.
CAUTION
The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assembly for several min-
utes after they have been acti-
vated.
WARNING
• Do not strike the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
• Improper handling of the pre-
tensioner seat belt assem-
blies, and failure to heed the
warnings not to strike, modify,
inspect, place, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inad-
vertent activation causing
serious injury.
Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
303
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Safety belt restraint system
We strongly recommend that the
driver and all passengers be proper-
ly restrained at all times by using the
safety belts provided with the vehi-
cle. Proper use of the safety belts
decreases the risk of severe injury or
death in accidents or sudden stops.
In most states, and in Canada, the
law requires their use.
All seats have lap/shoulder belts.
Inertial locks in the safety belt retrac-
tors allow all of the lap/shoulder safe-
ty belts to remain unlocked during
normal vehicle operation. This allows
the occupants some freedom of
movement and increased comfort
while using the safety belts. If a force
is applied to the vehicle, such as a
strong stop, a sharp turn, or a colli-
sion, the safety belt retractors will
automatically lock the safety belts.
Since the inertial locks do not require
a collision in order to lock up, you
may become aware of the safety
belts locking while braking or going
around sharp corners.
Always use the rear seat position(s)
to install your child restraint(s).
Never install a child restraint system
in the front passenger position, as an
inflating air bag could cause serious
or fatal injury to a child in that posi-
tion.
WARNING - Safety belts
To minimize the risk of serious
or fatal injury in an accident, the
driver and all passengers
should use the appropriate
safety restraints for their age
and size. The presence of air
bags does not change the need
to be properly restrained by a
safety belt or size-appropriate
child restraint. In fact, air bags
are designed to work the best
when passengers are correctly
restrained in the vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with the
information in this section,
including the information on
infant and child restraints. Read
the safety warnings on the sun
visors of your vehicle also.
331
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
The rear safety belts use a special
auto-lock feature designed to allow a
child restraint to be used in these
positions without an added locking
clip. They normally lock only under
extreme or emergency conditions
(emergency lock mode). However
they can be adjusted so that they
remain in fixed and locked when a
child restraint system is placed in
these positions. (Use this auto-lock
mode only to secure a child restraint,
never for passengers restrained by
the safety belts.) Page 3-44 gives
instructions on placing the safety belt
in the auto lock mode.
The drivers safety belt can only oper-
ate in the emergency lock mode.
Safety belts provide the best restraint
when:
• The seatback is upright.
• The occupant is sitting upright (not
slouched).
• The lap belt is snug across the hips.
• The shoulder belt is snug across
the chest.
• The knees are straight forward.
To help you remember to fasten your
safety belt, a warning light will come
on and a chime will sound. See
Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
on page 3-33.
WARNING - Cargo area
(if equipped)
Passengers should never be
allowed to ride in the cargo area
of a vehicle. No safety belts are
provided for the cargo area.
Persons riding in the vehicle
without a fastened safety belt
are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury or death
during an accident.
WARNING - Twisted belts
A twisted or jammed safety belt
cannot restrain you properly. If
you cannot untwist or unjam the
safety belt, have an authorized
Kia dealer it immediately. Never
drive or ride with a twisted or
jammed safety belt.
WARNING - After a colli-
sion
• Lap/shoulder belt assemblies
may be stretched or damaged
when subjected to the stress
and forces of a collision.
• The entire restraint system
should be inspected following
any collision. All belts, retrac-
tors, anchors and hardware
damaged by a collision should
be replaced before the vehicle
is operated again.
Knowing your vehicle
323
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Belt use
Safety belts must be used cor-
rectly to work properly in an
accident. Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly that
includes a buckle and tongue
designed to be used together.
For greatest effectiveness,fol-
low these guidelines in using
safety belts:
•Use the shoulder portion of
the safety belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder portion under the
arm.
• Never swing the safety belt
around your neck to fit over
the inside shoulder.
• Never wear the shoulder por-
tion of the safety belt across
the neck or face.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Wear the lap portion as low as
possible. Be sure that the lap
belt fits snugly around the
hips. Never wear a lap portion
of a lap/shoulder belt over
your waist; it should always
go over the stronger area of
your hips.
• Never use a single safety belt
for more than one person.
• The front seatbacks should
always remain in a comfort-
able, upright position when
the vehicle is moving.
(Continued)
•Inspect your safety belts peri-
odically for excessive wear or
damage. Pull out each belt
fully and look for fraying, cuts,
burns or other damage. Pull
the safety belt out and let it
retract a number of times.
Make sure that the lap/shoul-
der belts return smoothly and
easily into the retractor.
• Check the latches to make
sure they latch and release
without interference or delay.
• Never close the doors on any
part of the lap or shoulder
belt.
• Any belt not in good condition
or in good working order
should be promptly replaced.
WARNING - Safety belt
care
• A damaged belt may not give
you the protection you need in
an accident.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Never close the doors on any
part of the lap or shoulder belt.
It can damage the safety belt or
buckle which could increase the
risk of injury in case of an acci-
dent.
333
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Safety belt warning light and
chime
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not
fastened when the ignition switch is
turned ON, the safety belt warning
light and chime will activate for about
6 seconds. And if the lap/shoulder
belt is fastened when the ignition
switch is turned ON, the safety belt
warning light will blink for about 6
seconds.
If the lap/shoulder belt is unfastened
while the lap/shoulder belt is fas-
tened with the ignition switch ON, the
safety belt warning light will blink for
about 6 seconds and if the vehicle
speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph) the
safety belt warning light and chime
will activate until it is fastened.
Lap/shoulder belt
To fasten the lap/shoulder belt:
1. Grasp the buckle and tongue
plate.
2. Slowly pull the lap/shoulder belt
out from the retractor.
3. Insert the tongue plate (
1
) into the
open end of the buckle (
2
) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the belt is locked in the buckle.
1GQA2083
B180A01NF-1
Knowing your vehicle
343
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4. Position the lap portion of the belt
across your lap as LOW ON THE
HIPS as possible to reduce the
risk of sliding under it during an
accident. Adjust the belt to a
SNUG FIT by pulling up on the
shoulder portion of the safety belt.
The belt retractor is designed to
take up excess webbing automati-
cally and to maintain tension on
the belt. For your safety, do not put
any excess slack into the safety
belt at any location.
5. Adjust the shoulder anchor posi-
tion to your size. To raise the
anchor position, push the anchor
up (
1
). To lower the anchor posi-
tion, press (
2
) the button and slide
the anchor down (
3
). After adjust-
ment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt
is too near your neck, you will not be
getting the most effective protection.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
B200A02NF
OUN026100
WARNING - Beld adjust
• The height adjuster must be in
the locked position when the
vehicle is moving.
• The misadjustment of height
of the shoulder belt could
reduce the effectiveness of
the seat belt in a crash.
335
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
To unfasten the lap/shoulder belt:
Press the release button on the
buckle and allow the belt to slowly
retract.
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
3 Point rear center belt
(if equipped)
To fasten the rear center belt
1. Extract the tongue plates from the
holes on the belt assembly cover
and slowly pull the tongue plates
out from the retractor.
B210A01NF
1LDN2045 1LDN3207
Knowing your vehicle
363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the
open end of the buckle (C) until an
audible “click" is heard, indicating
the latch is locked. Make sure the
belt is not twisted.
3. Pull the tongue plate (B) and
insert the tongue plate into the
open end of the buckle (D) until an
audible “click” is heard, indicating
the latch is locked. Make sure the
belt is not twisted.
There will be an audible “click” when
the tab locks in the buckle. The seat
belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt is
adjusted manually so that it fits snug-
ly around your hips, if you lean for-
ward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and let you move around.
If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
1LDN3209
WARNING
When using the rear seat center
belt, you must lock all tongue
plates and buckle/anchor con-
nector. If any tongue plate or
buckle/anchor connector is not
locked, it will increase the
chance of injury or death in the
event of collision.
1LDN3208A
337
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
To unfasten the rear center belt
1. Press the release button on the
buckle (D) and remove the tongue
plate (B) from the buckle (D).
2. To retract the rear center seatbelt,
insert the key or similar small rigid
device into the web release button
(C) on the anchor connector. Pull
up on the seat belt web (A) and
allow the webbing to retract auto-
matically. (5 Door, if equipped)
3. Insert the tongue plates into the
holes and hang the tongue plates
on the hooks on the belt assembly
cover.
1LDN3211A
1LDN3210 1LDN3215
Knowing your vehicle
383
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Proper use and care of the
safety belt system
To ensure that the safety belts pro-
vide the maximum protection, please
follow these instructions:
• Use the belts at all times - even on
short trips.
• If the safety belt is twisted, straight-
en it prior to use.
• Keep sharp edges and damaging
objects away from the belts.
• Periodically inspect belt webbing,
anchors, buckles and all other
parts for signs of wear and dam-
age. Replace damaged, excessive-
ly worn or questionable parts
immediately.
• To clean the belt webbing, use a
mild soap solution recommended
for cleaning upholstery or carpets.
Follow the instructions provided
with the soap.
• Do not make modifications or addi-
tions to the safety belt.
• After wearing a safety belt, make
sure it fully retracts to the stowed
position. Do not allow the belt to
get caught in the door when you
close it.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE.
WARNING - Pregnant
women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the safe-
ty belt over the area of the
abdomen where the fetus is
located or above the abdomen
where the belt could injure the
fetus during an impact.
WARNING
Do not bleach or dye the web-
bing because this may weaken
the webbing fibers and allow
them to fail when loaded in a
collision.
339
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Restraint of infants and small
children
To increase their safety, infants and
young children should always be
restrained by a restraint system
approved for their age and size.
Never allow a child to stand or kneel
on the seat of a moving vehicle.
Never allow a safety belt to be placed
around both a child and an adult or
around two children at the same
time.
It is best for children to be seated in
the rear seats.
Many companies manufacture child
restraint systems (often called child
seats) for infants and small children.
An acceptable child restraint system
must always satisfy the Safety
Standards of your country. Make
sure that any child-restraint system
you use in your vehicle is labelled as
complying with those safety stan-
dards.
The child-restraint system should be
chosen to fit both the size of the child
and the size of the vehicle seat. Be
sure to follow any instructions provid-
ed by the child-restraint system man-
ufacturer when installing the child-
restraint system.
WARNING - Infants and
young children
• Infants and young children are
at much greater risk of serious
injury or death in an accident
or sudden stop if they are unre-
strained or restrained improp-
erly. Follow all instructions in
this section of your Kia manual
and the instructions that came
on and with an improved child
safety restraint system. The
child restraint must be correct-
ly installed in the vehicle, and
the child must be correctly
installed in the child restraint.
• All children under 12 are
safest in the back seat.
• Never install a child or infant
seat in the front passenger
position. The baby will be
injured or killed by the air bag
if it deploys in an accident.
•
Never allow a child to stand or
kneel on the seat of a moving
vehicle. Insist the child sit down
in an approved restraint system.
WARNING - Children on
laps
Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms in a moving vehi-
cle.
Even a very strong person can-
not hold onto a child in the
event of even a minor collision.
Knowing your vehicle
403
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Restraint of larger children
As children grow, they may need to
use new child-restraint systems,
including larger child seats or boost-
er seats, which are appropriate for
their increased size.
A child who has outgrown available
child-restraint systems should use
the belts provided in the vehicle.
When seated in the rear outboard
seats, the child should be restrained
by the lap/shoulder belt.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they may
need to be returned to a child
restraint system. In addition, after-
market devices are available from
independent manufacturers which
help pull the shoulder belt down and
away from the child’s face or neck.
Larger children should use one of
the seat belts provided.
WARNING - Shoulder
belts on small children
• Never allow a shoulder belt to
be in contact with a child’s
neck or face while the vehicle
is in motion.
• If safety belts are not properly
worn and adjusted, there is a
risk of death or serious injury
to such a child.
WARNING - Hot metal
parts
Safety belts and seats can
become hot in a vehicle that has
been closed during warm/hot
weather; they could burn a
child. Check seat covers and
buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
341
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Child restraint system
(if equipped)
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required by law. This child seat or
infant seat should be of appropriate
size for the child and should be
installed in accordance with the man-
ufacturer's instructions. It is strongly
recommended that the seat be
placed in the vehicle's rear seat
since this can make an important
contribution to safety.
Children riding in the car should sit
on the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
You are required by law to use safe-
ty restraints for children. If small chil-
dren ride in your vehicle you must
put them in a child restraint system
(safety seat).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car and seat belts,
and fits your child. Follow all the
instructions provided by the manu-
facturer when installing the child
restraint system.
ADAIR BAG
WARNING
• A child restraint system must
be placed in the rear seat.
Never install a child or infant
seat on the front passenger's
seat.
Should an accident occur and
cause the passenger air bag
to deploy, it could severely
injure or kill an infant or child
seated in an infant or child
seat. Thus, only use a child
restraint in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
(Continued)
Knowing your vehicle
423
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Continued)
•Always make sure that the
shoulder belt portion of the
lap/shoulder belt is positioned
midway over the shoulder,
never across the neck or
behind the back. The lap belt
portion of the lap/shoulder
belt must always be pos i-
tioned as low as possible on
the child's hips and as snug
as possible.
• If the seat belt will not proper-
ly fit the child the use of an
approved booster seat in the
rear seat must be used in
order to raise the child's seat-
ing height so that the seat belt
will properly fit the child.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never allow a child to stand up
or kneel on the seat.
• Never use an infant carrier or
child seat that "hooks" over a
seatback. It will not provide
adequate protection in an
accident.
• Never allow a child to be held
while they are in a moving
vehicle, as this could result in
serious injury or death to the
child in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stop. Holding
a child in a moving vehicle
does not provide the child
with any protection during an
accident, even if the person
holding the child is wearing a
seat belt.
(Continued)
• Since a safety belt or child
restraint system can become
very hot if it is left in a closed
vehicle, be sure to check the
seat cover and buckles before
placing a child there.
• When the child restraint sys-
tem is not in use, store it in the
trunk or fasten it with a safety
belt so that it will not be
thrown forward in the case of
a sudden stop or an accident.
• Children who are too large to
be in a child restraint should
sit in the rear seat and be
restrained with the available
lap/shoulder belts. Never
allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
343
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Installing a child restraint system
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats. Never place
a rear-facing child restraint in the
front passenger seat, because of
the danger that an inflating pas-
senger side air bag could impact
the rear-facing child restraint and
kill the child.
Since all passenger’s (except dri-
ver’s) safety belts move freely under
normal conditions and only lock
under extreme or emergency condi-
tions (emergency lock mode), you
must manually change these safety
belts to the auto lock mode to secure
a child restraint.
✽
NOTICE
The driver’s safety belt incorporates
the emergency lock mode only.
WARNING
• Do not install any child
restraint system in the front
passenger seat. Should an
accident occur and cause the
passenger air bag to deploy, it
could severely injure or kill an
infant or child seated in an
infant or child seat. Therefore,
only use a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat of your
vehicle.
• If the child restraint seat is not
anchored properly, the risk of
a child being seriously injured
or killed in a collision greatly
increases.
WARNING
• Before installing the child
restraint system, read the
instructions supplied by the
child restraint system manu-
facturer.
• If the seat belt does not oper-
ate as described, have the
system checked immediately
by your authorized Kia dealer.
• Failure to observe this manual
instructions regarding child
restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
increase the chance and/or
severity of injury in an acci-
dent.
Knowing your vehicle
443
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Placing a passenger safety
belt into the auto lock mode
The use of the auto lock mode will
ensure that the normal movement of
the child in the vehicle does not
cause the safety belt to be pulled out
and loosen the firmness of its hold
on the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.
Installing a child restraint system by
lap/shoulder belt
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1. Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoul-
der belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the safety belt webbing is not
twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an
emergency.
E2MS103005 E2BLD310
345
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
safety belt all the way out. When
the shoulder portion of the safety
belt is fully extended, it will shift
the retractor to the “Auto Lock”
(child restraint) mode.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the safety belt to retract and lis-
ten for an audible “clicking” or
“ratcheting” sound. This indicates
that the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode. If no distinct sound is
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the safety
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the safety belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
"Click"
MMSA3029 MMSA3030MMSA3028
Knowing your vehicle
463
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the safe-
ty belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the safety belt
to retract fully.
✽
NOTICE
When the safety belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the “Auto Lock” mode
to the emergency lock mode for nor-
mal adult usage.
Securing a child restraint seat
with “Tether Anchor” system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the shelf or floor behind
the rear seats.
1. Open the tether anchor cover on
the shelf or floor behind the rear
seats.
WARNING - Auto lock
mode
The lap/shoulder belt automati-
cally returns to the “emergency
lock mode” whenever the belt is
allowed to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each
time a child restraint is
installed.
If the safety belt is not placed in
the “auto lock” mode, severe
injury or death could occur to
the child and/or other occupants
in the vehicle in a collision,
since the child restraint will not
be effectively held in place.
1LDN3200/1LDN3200A
4 Door
5 Door
347
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
2. Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rest, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to
the correct child restraint hook
holder and tighten to secure the
seat.
2GHN3300A
WARNING
If the tether strap is secured
incorrectly, the child restraint
seat may not be restrained
properly in the event of a colli-
sion.
WARNING - Child
restraint
Check that the child restraint
system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different direc-
tions. Incorrectly fitted child
restraints may swing, twist, tip
or come away causing death or
injury.
WARNING
- Child restraint anchorage
• Child restraint anchorages are
designed to withstand only
those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted child restraints.
Under no circumstances are
they to be used for adult seat
belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or
equipment to the vehicle.
• The tether strap may not work
properly if attached some-
where other than the correct
tether anchor.
Knowing your vehicle
483
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Child seat lower anchors
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as International Standards
Organization Fixed (ISOFIX) or
ISOFIX-compatible child restraint
seats. These seats include two rigid
or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to two ISOFIX anchors
at specific seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of child restraint
seat eliminates the need to use seat
belts to attach the child seat in the
rear seats.
There is a symbol located on the
lower portion of each side of the rear
seatbacks. These symbols indicate
the position of the lower anchors for
child restraints so equipped.
1LDN3050 1LDN3100/1LDN3100A
Child lower anchor
Label
WARNING
When using the vehicle's
"ISOFIX" system to install a
child restraint system in the rear
seat, all unused vehicle rear
seat belt metal latch plates or
tabs must be latched securely in
their seat belt buckles and the
seat belt webbing must be
retracted behind the child
restraint to prevent the child
from reaching and taking hold
of unretracted seat belts.
Unlatched metal latch plates or
tabs may allow the child to
reach the unretracted seat belts
which may result in strangula-
tion and a serious injury or
death to the child in the child
restraint.
349
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
ISOFIX anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The ISOFIX anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no ISOFIX anchor pro-
vided for the center rear seating
position.
The ISOFIX anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions. Follow
the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
tions to properly install child restraint
seats with ISOFIX or ISOFIX-com-
patible attachments.
Once you have installed the ISOFIX
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the ISOFIX and
tether anchors. Also, test the child
restraint seat before you place the
child in it. Tilt the seat from side to
side. Also try to tug the seat forward.
Check to see if the anchors hold the
seat in place.
WARNING
If the child restraint is not
anchored properly, the risk of a
child being seriously injured or
killed in a collision greatly
increases.
1LDN3100/SBGQ03102
WARNING
• Do not mount more than one
child restraint to a single teth-
er or to a child restraint lower
anchorage point. The improp-
er increased load may cause
the anchorage points or tether
anchor to break, causing seri-
ous injury or death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not install a child restraint
seat at the rear center seating
position using the vehicle’s
ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX
anchors are only provided for
the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Do not mis-
use the ISOFIX anchors by
attempting to attach a child
restraint seat in the middle
rear seating position to the
ISOFIX anchors. In a crash,
the child restraint seat ISOFIX
attachments may not be
strong enough to secure the
child restraint seat improperly
in the rear center seating posi-
tion and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
• Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-
compatible child restraint seat
only to the appropriate loca-
tions shown in the illustration.
•Always follow the installation
and use ins
tructions provided
by the manufacturer of the
child restraint.
Knowing your vehicle
503
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
1JBN3511A/OMGA035047/OMGA035048/OMGA035049/OMGA035051/OMGA035052/OMGA035053/OMGA035055/OMGA035054/1LDN2166/1LDN2167/1LDN2168
1 2 3
5
4
7
(1) Driver’s air bag
(2) Front passenger’s air bag
(3) Side air bag*
(4) Curtain air bag*
(5) SRS Control Module
(6) Side impact sensor*
(7) Front impact sensor
(8) Front seat position sensor
(9) Occupant classification system
* : if equipped
98
6
351
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
What your air bag system
does
Driver’s air bag and front passen-
ger’s air bag are designed to supple-
ment the protection offered by the
safety belt in certain frontal colli-
sions. Likewise, side air bag and cur-
tain air bags are designed to supple-
ment the protection offered by the
safety belt in side collisions. Safety
belts are designed to reduce the
injury of the driver or passengers in
case of impact or collision. No safety
belt or air bag system can complete-
ly eliminate injuries that may cause
in collisions or impacts. To help
reduce impact on driver or passen-
gers in any collision, safety belts
must be correctly worn.
What your air bag system
does not do
The air bag system is designed to
supplement the protection offered by
the safety belt system. IT IS NOT A
SUBSTITUTE FOR THE SAFETY
BELT.
The importance of using
safety belts
There are four very important rea-
sons to use safety belts even with an
air bag supplemental restraint sys-
tem. They:
• help keep you in the proper posi-
tion (away from the air bag) when it
inflates.
• reduce the risk of harm in rollover,
side impact (vehicles not equipped
with side and curtain air bags) or
rear impact collisions, because an
air bag is not designed to inflate in
such situations and even a side
curtain air bag is designed to
inflate only in certain side impact
collisions.
• reduce the risk of harm in frontal or
side collisions which are not
severe enough to actuate the air
bag supplemental restraint system.
• reduce the risk of being ejected
from your vehicle.
Knowing your vehicle
523
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Air bags &
safety belts
• Even in vehicles with air bags,
you and your passengers
must always wear the safety
belts provided in order to min-
imize the risk and severity of
injury in the event of a colli-
sion or rollover.
•Always wear your safety belt.
It can help keep you away
from the air bags during heavy
braking just before a collision.
It may also reduce the risk of
occupant ejection.
• If occupants are not wearing
safety belts or correctly seat-
ed, they cannot be protected,
and thus face serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driver’s and front passenger’s
air bag are designed to inflate
only in certain frontal colli-
sions, and side and curtain air
bags (if equipped) are
designed to inflate in certain
side impacts. Frontal air bag
will generally not provide pro-
tection in side impacts (vehi-
cles not equipped with side
and curtain air bags) or rear
impacts, rollovers,less severe
frontal collisions. They will not
provide protection from later
impacts in a multi-impact col-
lision.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If your vehicle has been sub-
jected to flood conditions (e.g.
soaked carpeting/standing
water on the floor of the vehi-
cle, etc.) or if your vehicle has
become flood damaged in any
way, do not attempt to start
the vehicle or put the key in
the ignition before discon-
necting the battery.
Disregarding this precaution
may cause air bag deploy-
ment, which could result in
serious personal injury or
death. If your vehicle is sub-
jected to flooded conditions,
before starting the vehicle,
have the vehicle towed to an
authorized Kia dealer for
inspection and necessary
repairs.
353
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag system components
The main components of your SRS
are:
• To indicate that your vehicle is
equipped with air bags, the corre-
sponding air bag covers are
marked with “SRS AIR BAG”.
- Driver’s air bag
- Passenger’s air bag
- Side air bag
- Curtain air bag
• A diagnostic system that continual-
ly monitors the system operation.
• An indicator light to warn you of a
possible problem with the system.
• Emergency power backup in case
your car’s electrical system is dis-
connected in a crash.
The SRS uses a collection of sen-
sors to gather information about the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat
position, the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s safety belt usage and
impact severity.
The driver’s and front passenger’s
seat position sensors, which are
installed on the seat track, determine
if the seats are fore or aft of a refer-
ence position. Similarly, the safety
belt usage sensors determine if the
driver and front passenger’s safety
belts are fastened. These sensors
provide the ability to control the SRS
deployment based on how close the
driver’s seat is to the steering wheel,
how close the passenger’s seat is to
the instrument panel, whether or not
the safety belts are fastened, and
how severe is the impact.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The SRSCM (SRS Control Module)
controls the air bag inflation in accor-
dance with impact severity, seating
position and safety belt usage.
Additionally, your SRS is equipped
with an occupant classification sys-
tem in the front passenger’s seat.
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger
in the front passenger’s seat and will
turn off the front passenger’s air bag
under certain conditions. For more
detail, see “Occupant Classification
System” later in this section.
Knowing your vehicle
543
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAUTION
If the seat position sensor is not
working properly, the SRS air
bag warning light ( ) on the
instrument panel will illuminate
even if there is no malfunction
of the SRS air bag system,
because the SRS air bag warn-
ing light is connected with the
seat position sensor. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, if
it remains illuminated after
blinking for approximately 6
seconds, or if it illuminates
while the vehicle is being driv-
en, have an authorized Kia deal-
er inspect the seat position sen-
sor and the advanced SRS air
bag system as soon as possi-
ble.
WARNING
• Modification to the seat struc-
ture can adversely affect the
seat position sensor and
cause the air bag to deploy at
a different level than should
be provided.
• Failure to properly wear safety
belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury by causing
the air bags to deploy at a dif-
ferent level than should be
provided.
• Do not place any objects
underneath the front seats
which could damage the seat
position sensor or interfere
with the occupant classifica-
tion system.
• Do not place any objects that
may cause magnetic fields
near the front seat. These may
cause a malfunction of the
seat position sensor.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Ignoring the SRS indicator
light (air bag indicator and
passenger air bag off indica-
tor) can result in serious or
fatal injury if the air bags
occupant classification sys-
tem or pretensioners do not
work properly. Have your car
checked by a dealer as soon
as possible if the SRS warning
light alerts you to a potential
problem.
• Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
or fatal injury in a crash. All
occupants should sit upright
in their seats with their feet on
the floor until the vehicle is
parked and the ignition key is
removed.
355
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Driver’s air bag
The driver’s air bag is stored in the
center of the steering wheel.
Front passenger’s air bag
Front passenger’s air bag is stored in
the instrument panel on the glove
box.
Since you cannot anticipate which air
bags will deploy or from what direc-
tion, never put any objects or orna-
ments on the instrument panel.
WARNING
• You must always sit as far
back from the steering wheel
air bag as possible (chest at
least 250 mm (10 inches) away
from the steering wheel), while
still maintaining a comfortable
seating position for good
vehicle control, in order to
reduce the risk of injury or
death in a collision.
• Never place objects over the
air bag storage compartments
or between the air bags and
yourself. Due to the speed and
force of the air bag inflation,
such objects could hit your
body at high speed and cause
severe bodily injury and even
death.
• Do not put stickers or orna-
ments on the steering wheel
cover. These may interfere
with the deployment of the air
bag.
HLZ2120
OLD026048
1LDA2049
HLZ2121
Knowing your vehicle
563
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Occupant classification system
The occupant classification system
detects the presence of a passenger
in the front passenger's seat and will
turn off the front passenger's air bag
under certain conditions.
The occupant classification system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and deter-
mine if the front passenger's air bag
should be enabled (may inflate) or
not.
Only the front passenger air bag is
controlled by the Occupant
Classification System.
Main components of occupant
classification system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag system
should be activated or deactivated.
• A indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the frontal passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant classification system.
If there is no passenger in the front
passenger seat or if the passenger in
the front passenger seat is very light,
(such as a child), the front PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF indicator may
illuminate.
When this indicator is ON, the front
passenger front air bag will not
deploy.
1LDN2166 OLD036150N
The location of OCS Indicator
357
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person's legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
ing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air
bag and the safety belt.
• The OCS may not function proper-
ly if the passenger takes actions
which can defeat the detection sys-
tem. These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright posi-
tion.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
• The “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator illuminates after the igni-
tion key is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or after the engine is started. If
the front passenger's seat is occu-
pied by a very small person or is
occupied by someone who is
improperly seated, the “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF” indicator will
remain illuminated and the front
passenger air bag will not deploy in
frontal crashes. If the front passen-
ger’s seat is occupied by an adult
size person seated properly, the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator will turn off after approxi-
mately 4 seconds and the front
passenger's air bag will deploy in
frontal collision.
CAUTION
If the occupant classification
system is not working properly,
the air bag warning light ( ) on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate. If there is a malfunction of
the occupant classification sys-
tem, the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator will not illumi-
nate and the front passenger's
air bag will deploy in frontal
crashes even if there is child or
no occupant in the front pas-
senger’s seat. If the SRS air bag
warning light does not illumi-
nate when the ignition key is
turned to "ON" position, if it
remains illuminated after blink-
ing for approximately six sec-
onds, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized Kia dealer inspect
the occupant classification sys-
tem with the SRS air bag system
as soon as possible.
Knowing your vehicle
583
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant
classification system
Condition detected by
the occupant classifi-
cation system
1. Adult *
1
2. Child*
2
or child
restraint system
3. Unoccupied
Off
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
"PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator
light
SRS warning light
Front passenger front
air bag
Indicator/Warning light Devices
*
1
The system detects a person who is generally adult size as an adult, thus allowing
the passenger air bag to deploy. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger
seat, the system may detect their body shape as that of a child, thus preventing air
bag deployment.
*
2
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front pas-
senger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her
physique sitting posture, or objects in the lap of the occupant, thus permitting airbag
deployment.
CAUTION
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator illuminates or
blinks continuously when a per-
son of adult size sits in the front
passenger's seat, it could be
because that person isn't sitting
properly in the seat. If this hap-
pens, turn the vehicle off, make
sure the seat back is not
reclined, have the passenger
center on the seat cushion, with
legs comfortably extended, and
the safety belt properly posi-
tioned. Restart the vehicle and
have the person remain in this
position long enough to allow
the system to detect the person
and activate the passenger air
bag.
359
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is illuminated
when the front passenger's
seat is occupied by a person
of adult size who is seated
properly, or if the "PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator
is not illuminated when the
front passenger's seat is
unoccupied or occupied by a
very small person, the occu-
pant classification system is
not working properly. Have
your vehicle immediately
inspected by your Kia dealer if
the occupant classification
system is not working proper-
ly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a very low weight adult is
seated in the front passenger
seat, the occupant classifica-
tion system may or may not
turn off the right front passen-
ger air bag, depending upon
the person's seating position
and body type. Everyone in
your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly -- whether
or not there is an air bag for
that person.
• If the front seat passenger
changes their seating position
(for example, by not sitting
upright, by sitting on the edge
of the seat, or by otherwise
being out of position), the
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator may be turned on,
and the passenger air bag
may not deploy in a collision.
Always be sure to sit properly
in the front passenger seat
and wear the safety belt prop-
erly.
(Continued)
WARNING
If the front passenger seat
should be modified for persons
with disabilities that may affect
the operation of the occupant
classification system, contact
an authorized Kia dealer.
WARNING
• Even though your vehicle is
equipped with the occupant
classification system, do not
install a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat.
The child could be severely
injured or killed if the air bag
deploys. Children are afforded
the most protection in the
event of an accident when
they are restrained by the
proper restraint system in the
rear seat.
(Continued)
Knowing your vehicle
603
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
- Never sit with hips shifted
towards the front of the seat.
- Never lean on the center con-
sole.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
1KMN3665
1KMN3666
-Always sit in a proper seating
position.
- Never place feet on the dash-
board.
1KMN3661
1KMN3662
- Never put a heavy load in the
front passenger seat.
- Never excessively recline the
front passenger seatback.
361
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• If luggage or other objects are
placed on the front passenger's
seat or if the temperature of the
seat changes while the seat is unoc-
cupied, the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator may blink.
These conditions do not indicate a
problem.
• Do not put heavy objects on the
front passenger's seat. This may
cause front passenger air bag
deployment in the event of an acci-
dent, thus increasing your repair
costs.
WARNING - Front passen-
ger seating
• The front seat passenger air
bag is much larger than the
steering wheel air bag and
inflates with considerably
more force. It can seriously
hurt or kill a passenger who is
not in the proper position and
wearing the safety belt proper-
ly. The front passengers
should always move their seat
as far back as practical and sit
back in their seat.
• It is essential that the front
passengers always wear their
safety belts when vehicle is in
motion, even when the vehicle
is moving in a parking lot or
up a driveway into garage.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•
Do not modify or replace the
front passenger seat. This will
disable the OCS unless a prop-
er Kia replacement seat is used.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These can damage the occu-
pant classification system, if
they puncture the seat cush-
ion.
• Do not install accessory seat
covers on the front seats,
since these will interfere with
proper sensor operation.
Knowing your vehicle
623
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Side air bag (if equipped)
Side air bags are stored in the left
side of the driver’s seat and right side
of the front passenger’s seat.
If air bag inflation conditions are met
(side collision), they will inflate.
1LDA2056
1LDN2050/1LDN2051
(Continued)
• If the driver brakes the vehicle
heavily prior to an impact,
unbelted occupants will be
thrown forward. If the front
passenger is not wearing the
safety belts, they will be
directly in front of the air bag
when deployment occurs.In
that situation, serious injury
or death is possible.
• Never allow front passenger
to put their hands, feet or face
on or close to the instrument
panel. In the event of air bag
deployment, such a misposi-
tioned occupant would be
likely to suffer severe injury or
death.
• Never allow children, pregnant
women or weak persons to sit
in the front passenger seat.
They may be seriously injured
by the air bag inflation when
air bag deploys.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never allow children, pregnant
women or weak persons to sit
in the front passenger seat.
Do not put child restraint sys-
tem on the front passenger's
seat either. They may be seri-
ously injured by the airbag
inflation when airbag deploys.
• Do not put objects or stickers
on the instrument panel. Do
not apply any accessory to the
front windshield. Do not install
aftermarket mirrors or acces-
sories on the factory-installed
rearview mirror. Any of these
could interfere with the
deployment of the air bag or
could hit your body at high
speed and cause severe bodi-
ly injury and even death.
363
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Curtain air bag (if equipped)
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
• The curtain air bag deployment
occurs only on the side of the vehi-
cle affected by the impact.
• The side air bags (side and curtain
air bags) are not designed to
deploy during collisions from the
front or rear of the vehicle or in
most rollover situations.
• The curtain air bags are designed
to deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact.
WARNING
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers for the vehicle
equipped with side air bags.
Use of seat covers could inter-
fere with side air bag deploy-
ment.
If seat is damaged, have the
vehicle checked and repaired
by an authorized Kia dealer.
Inform them that your vehicle
is equipped with side air bags
and an occupant detection
system.
• Do not make modifications or
additions to the seats as they
may cause the air bag system
to malfunction resulting in
severe personal injury or
death.
1LDA2052
1LDA2057
Knowing your vehicle
643
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Side and cur-
tain air bags
• In order for side and curtain
air bags to provide the best
protection, both front seat
occupants and both outboard
rear occupants should sit in
an upright position with the
safety belts properly fastened.
Importantly, children should
sit in a proper child restraint
system in the rear seat.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats, they
must be seated in the proper
child restraint system. Make
sure to put the child restraint
system as far away from the
door side as possible, and
secure the child restraint sys-
tem in a locked position.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If a small child is seated on
the rear outboard seat cush-
ion, it is probable that they will
below the deployment level of
the side curtain airbag and
thus not protected by that
airbag.
• Do not allow the passengers
to lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and passengers when they are
seated on seats equipped with
side air bags.
• Never try to open or repair any
components of the side cur-
tain air bag sys tem. This
should only be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Failure to follow the above men-
tioned instructions can result in
severe injury or death to the
vehicle occupants in an acci-
dent.
365
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision?
(Inflation and non-inflation condi-
tions of the air bag)
There are many types of accidents in
which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional pro-
tection.
These include rear impacts, second
or third collisions in multiple impact
accidents, as well as low speed
impacts. In other words, just because
your vehicle is damaged and even if
it is totally unusable, don’t be sur-
prised that the air bags did not
inflate.
1JBA3512A/OMG035052/OMG035054/OMG035053/OMG035055
1
2
3
Air bag collision sensors
(1)
SRS control module
(2)
Front impact sensor
(3)
Side impact sensor (if equipped)
Knowing your vehicle
663
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Air bag inflation condition
Front air bag
Front air bags (driver’s and front pas-
senger’s air bags) are designed to
inflate when the impact is delivered
to front collision sensors depending
on the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision - general-
ly from an area a little to the left to a
little to the right of straight ahead.
WARNING
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should, causing severe
injury or death.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Problems may arise if the sen-
sor installation angles are
changed due to the deforma-
tion of front bumper, body or
B, C pillar where side collision
sensors are installed. Have
the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
• Your vehicle has been
des igned to absorb impact
and deploy the air bag(s) in
certain collisions.Installing
aftermarket bumper guards or
replacing a bumper with non-
genuine parts may adversely
affect your vehicles collision
and air bag deployment per-
formance.
1LDA2059
367
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Side air bag (if equipped)
Side air bags (side and curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when
an impact is detected by side colli-
sion sensors depending on the
strength, speed or angles of impact
of side impact collision or rollover by
the side impact.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate only in frontal col-
lision, it may inflate in any collision if
front impact sensors detect a suffi-
cient impact. Side air bags (side and
curtain air bags) are designed to
inflate only in side impact collision, it
may inflate in any collision if side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unim-
proved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic.
To protect occupants, front air bags
or pre-tensioner safety belts may
deploy in certain side impact colli-
sions.
1JBA3514
OUN026090
Knowing your vehicle
683
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain collisions, the vehicle
safety belts are sufficient to protect
the vehicle occupants and the air
bags may not deploy. In some
cases, deploying air bags in low-
speed collisions can cause a sec-
ondary impact to the occupants
(light abrasions, cuts, burns, etc.),
or loss of vehicle control.
• Frontal air bags are not designed
to inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
the air bags do not provide proper
protection.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collision, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, frontal air bag deployment
does not provide occupant protec-
tion.
However, side or curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the inten-
sity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
1GHA22731LDA2061 1JBA3516
369
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
• In a slant impact or collision, the
force delivered will be relatively
weaker than that of frontal colli-
sion. So, the air bags may not
inflate.
• At the moment of an accident, driv-
ers often brake heavily with reflex.
In such heavy braking, the front
portion of the vehicle is lowered by
the force of the braking and the
vehicle can dive under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this situa-
tion because impacts may not be
delivered or may be delivered with
less intensity.
• Air bags may not inflate in rollover
accidents because air bag deploy-
ment would not provide proper pro-
tection to the occupants.
However, side air bags may inflate
when the vehicle is rolled over by a
side impact collision, if the vehicle
is equipped with side air bags and
curtain air bags.
1GHA2270 1LDA2065 1LDA2066
Knowing your vehicle
703
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bag only operates when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or START positions.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col-
lision (if equipped with side air bag
or curtain air bag) in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate by the severity of a collision
and its direction. These two factors
determine whether the sensors
send out an electronic deploy-
ment/inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehi-
cles or objects which your vehicle
hits in the collision. Though, factors
are not limited to those mentioned
above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is impossible for you to see the
air bags inflate during an accident.
It is much more likely that you will
simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage com-
partments after the collision.
1JBA3518
371
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of the extremely short time in which
a collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occu-
pant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which normally can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones, and sometimes
more serious injuries because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries,especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering
wheel.
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
to both the safety belt and the air
bag, as well as from breathing the
smoke and powder. We strongly
urge you to open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possi-
ble after impact in order to reduce
discomfort and prevent prolonged
exposure to the smoke and pow-
der.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic, it may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes, nose and throat etc).
Wash and rinse with the cold water
immediately and consult the doctor if
the symptom persists.
WARNING
• To avoid severe personal
injury or death caused by
deploying air bags in a colli-
sion, the driver should sit as
far back from the steering
wheel air bag as possible (at
least 250 mm (10 inches)
away). The front passenger
should always move their seat
as far back as possible and sit
back in their seat.
• Air bag inflates instantly in an
event of collision, passengers
may be injured by the air bag
expansion force if they are not
in proper position.
• Air bag inflation may cause
injuries which normally
include facial or bodily abra-
sions, injuries by the broken
glasses or burns by the explo-
sives.
Knowing your vehicle
723
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger seat is
extremely dangerous and
should never be done.
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger seat.
If the air bag deploys, it would impact
the rear-facing child restraint, caus-
ing severe or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the improp-
erly positioned or improperly
restrained child.
WARNING
• Extreme Hazard! Do not use a
rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an air
bag in front of it!
• Never put child restraint in the
front passenger’s seat. If the
front passenger air bag
inflates, it would cause seri-
ous or fatal injuries.
• When children are seated in
the rear outboard seats in
which curtain air bags are
equipped, be sure to put the
child restraint system as far
away from the door side as
possible, and secure the child
restraint system to be locked
in position.
Inflation of curtain air bag (if
equipped) could cause severe
injury or death due to the
expansion impact.
WARNING
When the air bags deploy, the
air bag related parts in steering
wheel and/or instrument panel
and/or in both sides of the roof
rails above the front and rear
doors are very hot. To prevent
injury, do not touch the air bag
storage areas internal compo-
nents immediately after an air
bag has inflated.
1JBH3051
373
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Air bag warning light
The purpose of air bag warning light
in your instrument panel is to alert
you of a potential problem with your
air bag - Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should blink or
illuminate for approximately 6 sec-
onds, then go off.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after the engine
starts.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
Air bag (Supplemental
Restraint System) service
Your Supplemental Restraint System
is virtually maintenance-free. There
are no parts which you can service.
You must have the system serviced
under the following circumstances:
• If an air bag ever inflates, the air
bag must be replaced. Do not try to
remove or discard the air bag by
yourself. This must be done by an
authorized Kia dealer.
• If the air bag warning indicator light
alerts you to a problem, have the
air bag system checked as soon as
possible. Otherwise, your air bag
system may be ineffective.
A-BAG-W
Knowing your vehicle
743
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Repairing or scrapping the vehi-
cles
• Repairing steering wheel, instru-
ment panel, center console or
roofs, or installing car audio around
center console or painting front
metal sheet could disable the air
bag system. Have them checked
by an authorized Kia dealer.
• When leaving the vehicle at an
authorized Kia dealer, inform the
facility that the vehicle is equipped
with air bag system, and leave the
owner’s manual in the vehicle.
• Since air bag system contains
explosive chemical substances,
contact an authorized Kia dealer
when scrapping the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not modify any part of the
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modification could make the air
bag system ineffective or could
cause unnecessary deploy-
ment.
WARNING
• Do not modify your steering
wheel, seat or any other part
of the Supplemental Restraint
System. Modification could
make the system inoperable.
• Do not work on the system’s
components or wiring. This
could cause the air bags to
inflate inadvertently, possibly
seriously injuring someone.
Working on the system could
also disable the system so
that the air bags would not
deploy in a collision.
• Any work on the SRS system,
such as removing, installing,
repairing, or any work on the
steering wheel must be per-
formed by a qualified Kia tech-
nician. Improper handling of
the air bag system may result
in serious personal injury or
death.
375
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Airbag warning label
Airbag warning labels which are now
required by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS)
are attached to alert driver and pas-
sengers of potential risk of airbag
system.
Note that these government warn-
ings focus on the risk to children, Kia
also wants you to be aware of the
risks which adults are exposed to.
Those have been described in previ-
ous pages.
OLD037901N/1LDN2069A/1LDE2069
(if equipped)
Knowing your vehicle
763
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Outside the vehicle
• To open the trunk, insert the key
into the lock and turn it clockwise
(
1
).
• To close the trunk, use both hands
to push the trunk lid down. Check
to see if the trunk is completely
shut.
• Trunk can be opened with transmit-
ter (if equipped).
Trunk room lamp
Trunk room lamp turns on when the
trunk is opened. It remains on until
the trunk is securely closed.
Inside the vehicle
To open the trunk from inside the
vehicle push trunk lid release switch.
TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED)
1LDA2015
OLD026014
CAUTION
Make sure to close the trunk
securely. If it remains open
while engine is not running, it
may cause battery discharge
because trunk room lamp
remains on.
OLD026016N
377
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Emergency trunk safety
release (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emergency trunk release cable locat-
ed inside the trunk. The lever glows
in the dark when the trunk lid is
closed. If someone is inadvertently
locked in the trunk, pulling this han-
dle will release the trunk latch mech-
anism and open the trunk.
WARNING - Exhaust
fumes
If you drive with the trunk lid
open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
causing serious injury or death
to vehicle occupants. Open
trunk lids can also dangerously
obscure rear view vision.
If you must drive with the trunk
lid open, keep the air vents open
so that additional outside air
comes into the vehicle.
OLD026017
WARNING
No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk of the vehicle
at any time. If the trunk is par-
tially or totally latched and the
person is unable to get out,
severe injury or death could
occur due to lack of ventilation,
exhaust fumes and rapid heat
build-up, or because of expo-
sure to cold weather conditions.
The trunk is also a highly dan-
gerous location in the event of a
crash because it is not a pro-
tected occupant space but
merely a part of the vehicle’s
crush zone.
Knowing your vehicle
783
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Opening the hood:
1. Pull the release lever on the lower
left side of the instrument panel to
unlatch the hood. The hood should
pop open slightly.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle,
slightly raise the hood, push the
secondary latch (
1
) inside of the
hood center and lift (
2
) the hood.
WARNING
• If a person is locked in the
trunk, they can pull the emer-
gency release to open the
trunk lid.
• We recommend that cars be
kept locked and keys be kept
out of the reach of children,
and that parents teach their
children about the dangers of
playing in trunks.
HOOD
1LDA2020
OLD026023
379
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
3. Lift the hood and hold it open with
the prop rod by inserting the free
end of the rod into the slot in the
hood.
Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2. Secure the support rod in its clip.
3. Lower the hood to about 30 cm
(12 inches) height and then let it
drop to properly lock in place.
Make sure the hood is properly
locked before driving.
1LDA2166
WARNING
Handle the support rod in the
area wrapped in rubber.The rub-
ber will help prevent you from
being burned by hot metal when
the engine is hot.
WARNING
• Before closing the hood, make
sure that all engine parts and
tools have been removed from
the engine area and that no
one’s hands are near the hood
opening.
• Do not leave gloves,rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
Knowing your vehicle
803
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cause serious injuries.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap is
venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
1. Stop the engine.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the
release lever.
3. Pull the fuel filler lid out to open.
4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel
tank cap counterclockwise.
5. Refuel as needed.
6. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it “clicks”. This indicates that
the cap is securely tightened.
7. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
FUEL FILLER LID
1LDA2019OLD026018
WARNING
To avoid injury from sharp
edges, it is recommended that
protective gloves be worn if
there is a need to open the fuel
filler door manually.
WARNING
Automotive fuels are flamma-
ble/explosive materials. When
refueling, please note the fol-
lowing guidelines carefully.
Failure to follow these guide-
lines may result in severe per-
sonal injury, severe burns or
death by fire or explosion.
• Before refueling always note
the location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station facility.
(Continued)
381
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
(Continued)
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle or fuel filler cap, you
should eliminate potentially
dangerous static electricity
discharge by touching anoth-
er metal part of the front of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing. Do not touch, rub or slide
against any item or fabric
(polyester, satin, nylon, etc.)
capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors resulting in explosion.
If you must re-enter the vehi-
cle, you should once again
eliminate potentially danger-
ous static electricity dis-
charge by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, away from
the fuel filler neck, nozzle or
other gasoline source.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When using a portable fuel
container be sure to place the
container on the ground prior
to refueling. Static electricity
discharge from the container
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Once refueling has
begun, contact with the vehi-
cle should be maintained until
the filling is complete. Us e
only portable fuel containers
designed to carry and store
gasoline.
• Do not use cellular phones
around a gas station or while
refueling any vehicle. Electric
current and/or electronic
interference from cellular
phones can potentially ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire. If
you must use your cellular
phone, use it in a place away
from the gas station.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When refueling always shut
the engine off. Sparks pro-
duced by electrical compo-
nents related to the engine
can ignite fuel vapors causing
a fire. Always insure that the
engine is OFF before and dur-
ing refueling. Once refueling
is complete, check to make
sure the fuel filler cap and
door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
• Do not light any fire around a
gas station. DO NOT use
matches or a lighter and DO
NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cig-
arette in your vehicle while at
a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can,
when ignited, result in explo-
sion by flames.
(Continued)
Knowing your vehicle
823
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refu-
eling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately con-
tact the manager of the gas
station or contact the police
and local fire department.
Follow any safety instructions
they provide.
(Continued)
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a gen-
uine Kia cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system. Correct
replacement caps are avail-
able at authorized Kia dealers.
• Do not spill fuel on the exteri-
or surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the
paint.
• A loose fuel filler cap may
cause the “Check Engine”
(Malfunction Indicator) light in
the instrument panel to illumi-
nate unnecessarily.
• If the fuel filler lid will not open
in cold weather because the
area around it is frozen, push
or lightly tap the lid.
CAUTION
• Make sure to refuel with gaso-
line (unleaded fuel) only for
the gasoline engine vehicles.
• Check to make sure the fuel
filler cap is securely closed
after refueling.
(Continued)
383
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can
either be adjusted remotely with the
control levers or remote switch,
depending on the type your vehicle
has. The mirror heads can be folded
back to prevent damage when using
an automatic car wash or passing in
a narrow street.
MIRRORS
CAUTION
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
WARNING
• The right outside rearview
mirror is convex. Objects seen
in the mirror are closer than
they appear.
•Use your interior rearview mir-
ror or direct observation to
determine the actual distance
of following vehicles when
changing lanes.
Knowing your vehicle
843
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Manual remote control
(if equipped)
To adjust an outside mirror, move the
control lever which is located at the
forward inside area of the window
frame.
Electric remote control
(if equipped)
The electric remote control mirror
switch allows you to adjust the posi-
tion of the left and right outside
rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror, move the lever
(
1
) to R or L to select the right side
mirror or the left side mirror, then
press a corresponding point (
•
) on
the mirror adjustment control to posi-
tion the selected mirror up, down, left
or right.
After adjustment, put the lever into
neutral position to prevent the inad-
vertent adjustment.
1LDN2080
➀
CAUTION
• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum
adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is depressed.
Do not depress the switch
longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hands. Doing so may damage
the parts.
1LDA2081
385
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Folding the outside rearview
mirror
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Outside rearview mirror heater
(if equipped)
The outside rearview mirror heater is
actuated in connection with the rear
window defroster. To heat the outside
rearview mirror glass, push the but-
ton for the rear window defroster.
The outside rearview mirror glass will
be heated for defrosting or defogging
and will give you improved rear
vision in inclement weather condi-
tions. Push the button again to turn
the heater off. The outside rearview
mirror heater automatically turns off
after 20 minutes.
Day/night rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror to center
on the view through the rear window.
Make this adjustment before you
start driving.
WARNING
Do not place objects in the rear
seat or cargo area which would
interfere with your vision out
the rear window.
1LDA2083
Knowing your vehicle
863
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Manual type
Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
Electric type (if equipped)
When the engine is running, the
glare is automatically controlled by
the sensor mounted in the rearview
mirror.
The sensor mounted in the mirror
senses the light level around the vehi-
cle, and through a chemical reaction,
automatically controls the headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into reverse (R), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is ON, the
automatic-dimming function will turn
on automatically.
Press the ON/OFF button (
1
) to turn
the automatic-dimming function off.
The mirror indicator light will turn off.
Press the ON/OFF button (
1
) once
again to turn the automatic-dimming
function on. The mirror indicator light
will illuminate.
1LDA2078
Day
Night
Day/Night lever
1KMA3084
➀
SensorIndicator
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
387
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Map light
Front (if equipped)
The lights are turned ON or OFF by
pressing the corresponding switch.
Dome light (if equipped)
(1) OFF - The light stays off even
when a door is open.
(2) DOOR - The light turns on when a
door is opened or when a door is
unlocked by the transmitter (if
equipped). Interior light goes out
slowly after 30 seconds if the
door is closed. However if the
ignition switch is ON or all vehicle
doors are locked when the door is
closed, interior light will turn off
even within 30 seconds.
(3) ON - The light turns on and stays
on even when the doors are all
closed.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
1LDA2113
OLD026111
OLD026112
Type A
Type B
Knowing your vehicle
883
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Center console storage
To open either of the console storage
compartments, push the button (1) or
pull up the lever (2).
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or front passenger.
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders , or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
OLD026151
CAUTION
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartment.
•Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place many items in the stor-
age compartment that the
storage compartment cover
can not close securely.
389
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Glove box
To open the glove box, pull the han-
dle (
1
) then the glove box will auto-
matically open (
2
). Close the glove
box after use.
Sunglass holder
(if equipped)
A sunglass storage compartment is
provided on the overhead console.
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses in the
compartment door with the lenses
facing out. Push to close.
1LDA2156
CAUTION
Since key is not fully inserted
into the glove box key set, do
not apply excessive force.
Doing so may damage the parts.
CAUTION
Make sure the sunglass holder
is closed while driving.
OLD028159
Knowing your vehicle
903
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cigarette lighter
Front
To operate the cigarette lighter, press
it in and release it. When it is heated,
it automatically pops out ready for
use.
If the engine is not running, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ACC posi-
tion for the lighter to operate.
Ashtray
Front
The front ashtray may be opened by
pushing in the ashtray lid. To clean
the ashtray, the plastic receptacle
should be removed by lifting the plas-
tic ash receptacle upward and pulling
it out.
INTERIOR FEATURES
WARNING - Ashtray use
• Do not use the vehicle’s ash-
trays as waste receptacles.
• Putting lit cigarettes or match-
es in an ashtray with other
combustible materials may
cause a fire.
OLD026148
OLD026147
CAUTION
• Do not hold the lighter in after
it is already heated because it
will overheat.
• Only a genuine Kia lighter
should be used in the ciga-
rette lighter socket. The use of
plug-in accessories (shavers,
hand-held vacuums, and cof-
fee pots, for example) may
damage the socket or cause
electrical failure.
• If the lighter does not pop out
within 30 seconds, remove it
to prevent overheating.
391
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Cup holder
Front
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Rear (if equipped)
To use cup holders in rear seat, pull
the rear cup holder cover (
1
) out.
Push the cover to close after use.
WARNING - Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills,you
could be burned. Such a burn
to the driver could cause a
loss of control of the vehicle.
• To reduce the risk of personal
injury in the event of sudden
stop or collision, do not place
uncovered or insecure bot-
tles,glasses, cans, etc., in the
cup holder while the vehicle is
in motion.
OLD028153
OLD026152
CAUTION
Do not place heavy cups or
cans in cup holders. Cup hold-
ers could be damaged.
Knowing your vehicle
923
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use a sunvisor for a side window,
pull it downward, unsnap it from the
bracket (
1
) and swing it to the side.
To use the vanity mirror, pull down
the visor and pull up the mirror cover
(driver’s side) (
2
).
Power socket (if equipped)
The power outlets are designed to
provide power for mobile telephones
or other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 10
amps with the engine running.
OLD026150
CAUTION
Close the vanity mirror cover
(driver’s side) securely and
return the sunvisor to its original
position after use. If the vanity
mirror is not closed securely, the
lamp (if equipped) will stay on
and could result in battery dis-
charge and possible sunvisor
damage.
1LDN2151
OLD028151
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
393
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Digital clock (if equipped)
Whenever the battery terminals,
ROOM fuse, or Power Connect are
disconnected, you must reset the
time.
When the ignition switch is in the
ACC or ON position, the clock but-
tons operate as follows:
• HOUR:
Pressing the “H” button with your
finger, a pencil or similar object will
advance the time displayed by one
hour.
• MINUTE:
Pressing the “M” button with your
finger, a pencil or similar object will
advance the time displayed by one
minute.
Display conversion
To change the 12 hour format to the
24 hour format, press the “H+M” but-
ton at the same time for more than 4
seconds.
For example, if the “H+M” button is
pressed at the same time for more
than 4 seconds while the time is
10:15 p.m., the display will be
changed to 22:15.
CAUTION
•Use when the engine is run-
ning, and remove a plug from
the power outlet after using
the electric appliance. Using
electrical accessories when
the engine is not running may
result in battery discharge.
• Only use 12V accessories
which are rated for less than
10A maximum current draw.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operation
level when you have to use the
power socket while using air-
conditioner or heater.
•Close the cover when not in
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle's
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
OLD038151N
Knowing your vehicle
943
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If your vehicle is equipped with this
feature, you can slide or tilt your sun-
roof with the sunroof control buttons
located on the overhead console.
(1) Slide button
(2) Tilt button
(3) Close button
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
Sliding the sunroof
Autoslide open
To use the autoslide feature,
momentarily (less than 0.4 second)
press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button
on the overhead console. The sun-
roof will slide all the way open. To
stop the sunroof sliding at any point,
press any sunroof control button.
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button
on the overhead console for more
than 0.4 second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the
CLOSE ( ) button on the over-
head console and hold it until the
sunroof is closed.
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
OLD028022
CAUTION
• Do not continue to press the
sunroof control button(s) after
the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed, or tilt
position(s). Damage to the
motor or system components
could occur.
• The sunroof cannot slide
when it is in the tilt position
nor can it be tilted while in an
open or slide position.
395
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
Tilting the sunroof
Autotilt open
To use the autotilt feature, momen-
tarily (less than 0.4 second) press
the TILT UP ( ) button on the
overhead console. The sunroof will
tilt all the way open. To stop the sun-
roof tilting at any point, press any
sunroof control button.
Manual tilt open
Press the TILT UP ( ) button on
the overhead console for more than
0.4 second.
Close
To close the sunroof, press the
CLOSE ( ) button on the over-
head console and hold it until the
sunroof is closed.
Sunshade
The sunshade will be opened with
the glass panel automatically when
the glass panel is slid. You will have
to close it manually if you want it
closed.
E2BLA361
CAUTION
• Do not press any sunroof con-
trol button longer than neces-
sary. Damage to the motor or
system components could
occur.
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
• The sunroof is made to slide
together with sunshade. Do
not leave the sunshade closed
while the sunroof is open.
WARNING
• Do not extend face or arms
outside through the sunroof
opening while driving.
• Make sure hand and face are
safely out of the way before
closing a sunroof.
Knowing your vehicle
963
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
In case of an emergency
If the sunroof does not open electri-
cally:
1. Open the sunglass holder.
2. Remove the two (2) screws, and
then remove the overhead con-
sole.
3. Insert the emergency handle (pro-
vided with the vehicle) and turn
the handle clockwise to open or
counterclockwise to close.
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, or you use
the emergency handle to operate the
sunroof, you have to reset your sun-
roof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the ON
position.
2. According to the position of the
sunroof, do as follows.
1) in case that the sunroof has
closed completely or been tilt-
ed
: Press the TILT UP ( ) but-
ton for 1 second.
2) in case that the sunroof has
slide-opened
: Press and hold the CLOSE
( ) button for more than 5
seconds until the sunroof has
closed completely. And then
press the TILT UP ( ) but-
ton for 1 second.
3. Then, release it.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP ( )
button once again until the sun-
roof has returned to the original
position of TILT UP ( ) after it is
raised a little higher than the max-
imum TILT UP ( ) position.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
1LDN3201
397
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
To keep items from shifting in the
trunk, you can use the four rings
located in the trunk to attach the
cargo net.
LUGGAGE NET (IF EQUIPPED)
MMSA3066
WARNING
To avoid eye injury. DO NOT
overstretch the netting.
ALWAYS keep face and body
out of recoil path.
DO NOT use the luggage net
when strap has visible signs of
wear or damage.
CAUTION
Do not put fragile, bulky or
excessive quantity of items into
luggage net. They could be dam-
aged.
Knowing your vehicle
983
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fixed rod antenna
(if equipped)
Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals.
This antenna is removable. To
remove the antenna, turn it counter-
clockwise.To install the antenna, turn
it clockwise.
Roof type antenna (if equipped)
If your vehicle has an audio system,
an amplifying antenna is installed in
your vehicle.
This antenna is removable. To remove
the antenna, turn it counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
Aux outlet
You can use an aux outlet to connect
an audio device.
✽
NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
ANTENNA
1LDN3204
6LDN3001A
CAUTION
• Be sure to remove the antenna
before washing the car in an
automatic car wash or it may
be damaged.
• When reinstalling your anten-
na, it is important that it is
fully tightened to ensure prop-
er reception.
OLD026157
399
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
How car audio works
AM and FM radio signals are broad-
cast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercept-
ed by the radio antenna on your car.
This signal is then received by the
radio and sent to your car speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction.
However, in some cases the signal
coming to your vehicle may not be
strong and clear. This can be due to
factors such as the distance from the
radio station, closeness of other
strong radio stations or the presence
of buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
casts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low fre-
quencies. These long, low frequency
radio waves can follow the curvature
of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere. In
addition, they curve around obstruc-
tions so that they can provide better
signal coverage.
AUDIO SYSTEM
¢¢¢
JBM001
¢¢¢
¢¢¢
JBM002
FM reception AM reception
Knowing your vehicle
1003
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade at short distances from
the station. Also, FM signals are eas-
ily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can
result in certain listening conditions
which might lead you to believe a
problem exists with your radio. The
following conditions are normal and
do not indicate radio trouble:
• Fading - As your car moves away
from the radio station, the signal
will weaken and sound will begin to
fade. When this occurs, we sug-
gest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can dis-
turb the signal causing static or
fluttering noises to occur. Reducing
the treble level may lessen this
effect until the disturbance clears.
• Station Swapping - As a FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
signals being received from sever-
al directions can cause distortion
or fluttering. This can be caused by
a direct and reflected signal from
the same station, or by signals
from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
JBM003
FM radio station
¢¢¢
JBM004 JBM005
3 101
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Using a cellular phone or a
two-way radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio equipment. This does
not mean that something is wrong
with the audio equipment. In such a
case, use the cellular phone at a
place as far as possible from the
audio equipment.
Care of cassette tapes
(if equipped)
• Because the thickness of a
sette tape with the total playback
time of over 60 minutes (C-60) are
too thin, we suggest that you do
not use any of them to avoid hav-
ing tapes being tangled.
• To achieve better sound qu
periodically clean the tape head
using a cotton stick with colorless
alcohol (once per month).
• If a tape is too loose, fasten
reel by winding with objects like a
pencil.
• Because dust or foreign objec
a cassette tape may damage the
playback head, always store tapes
in their cases when not in use.
• Make sure cassette tapes are
away from magnetic devices (TV,
stereo system, etc) in order to
achieve better sound quality.
• Be certain that no objects or
stances other than cassette tapes
are inserted into the cassette tape
player.
• Because tape media can be
torted when exposed to direct sun-
light, Do not leave cassette tapes
on the seats, dashboard or near
the back windshield.
WARNING - Cellular
phones
Don’t use a cellular phone when
you are driving. The driver must
stop at a safe place to use a cel-
lular phone.
Knowing your vehicle
1023
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Care of disc (if equipped)
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows for
ventilation before using your car
audio.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE files with-
out permission (If equipped with
M465, use only MP3/WMA, if
equipped with M445, use only CD-
DA). Use CDs that are created only
by lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analogue disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged. Hold and carry
CDs by the edges or the edges of
the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper onto it.
• Make sure on undesirable matter
other than CDs are inserted into
the CD player (Do not insert more
than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
• Depending on the type of CD-
R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
manufacturing companies or mak-
ing and recording methods. In such
circumstances, if you still continue
to use those CDs, they may cause
the malfunction of your car audio
system.
✽
NOTICE -
Playing an
Incompatible Copy-Protected
Audio CD
Some copy-protected CDs, which do
not comply with the international
audio CD standards (Red Book),
may not play on your car audio.
Please note that if you try to play
copy protected CDs and the CD
player of your car audio is not per-
forming to your expectation, this
may be caused by those CDs and not
a defect in the device itself. Please
replace those CDs.
3 103
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. BAND (AM/FM) Select Buttons
3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control Knob
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
5. SCAN Button
6. EQ Button
7. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
LD 445 NA
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)
Knowing your vehicle
1043
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. POWER ON-OFF Control
Knob
• The radio unit may be operated
when the ignition key is in the
“ACC”or “ON” position. Press the
knob to switch the power on. The
LCD shows the radio frequency in
radio mode, and displays the CD
track in CD mode. To switch the
power off, press the knob again.
• Push the FM/AM or CD to turn on
that function without pushing the
Power ON-OFF control knob.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to
increase the volume and turn the
knob counterclockwise to reduce the
volume.
2. BAND Selector
FM Selection Button
Pressing the button changes
the FM1 and FM2 bands.
AM Select Button
Pressing the button selects
the AM band. AM mode is displayed
on the LCD.
3. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control
Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to
increase the frequency and turn the
knob counterclockwise to reduce the
frequency.
Audio Control
Pressing the Audio Control knob
changes the BASS, MID-RANGE,
TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
mode.
The mode selected is shown on the
display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the
Audio control knob clockwise or
counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease
the BASS, rotate the knob counter-
clockwise.
MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate
the knob clockwise, while to
decrease the MID-RANGE, rotate
the knob counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease
the TREBLE, rotate the knob coun-
terclockwise.
FADER Control
Rotate the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker
sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to empha-
size right speaker sound (left speak-
er sound will be attenuated). When
the control knob is turned counter-
clockwise, left speaker sound will be
emphasized (right speaker sound
will be attenuated).
AM
FM
3 105
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the side is pressed, the unit
will automatically tune to the next
higher frequency and when the
side is pressed, it will automatically
tune to the next lower frequency.
5. SCAN Button
When you Press the button, frequen-
cy is changed and the next channel
is received automatically.
To stay on a station, press the SCAN
button again.
6. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the
CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and
OFF MODE for the desired tone
quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
7. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the
electronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may
be programmed into the memory of
the radio. Then, by simply pressing
the AM/FM band select buttons
and/or one of the six station select
buttons, you may recall any of these
stations instantly.
To program the stations, follow these
steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the
band for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be
stored by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access
that station.
• Press and hold the station select
button for more than 0.8 seconds.
A select button indicator will show
in the display indicating which
select button you have depressed.
The frequency display will flash
after it has been stored into the
memory. You should then release
the button, and proceed to pro-
gram the next desired station. A
total of 18 stations can be pro-
grammed by selecting one AM and
two FM stations per button.
• When completed, any preset sta-
tion may be recalled by selecting
AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
appropriate station button.
CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system.The audio
system mechanism may be
damaged if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything
to impact the audio system,
damage to the system mecha-
nisms could occur.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
Knowing your vehicle
1063
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. CD/AUX Select Button
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
3. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. CD SCAN Button
6. CD EJECT Button
7. RANDOM (RDM) Button
LD 445 NA
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (M445) (IF EQUIPPED)
3 107
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. CD/AUX Select Button
CD Select
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• When a disc is in the CD deck, if
you press the CD/AUX button the
CD player will begin playing even if
the radio player is being used.
• The CD/AUX player can be used
when the ignition switch is in either
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on
that function without pushing the
Power ON-OFF control knob.
✽
NOTICE
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on
the label side or the recording side
of any discs, as it may cause a mal-
function.
• The unit cannot play a CD-
R(Recordable CD) and CD-
RW(Rewritable CD) that is not
finalized.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Please refer to the manual of CD-
R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-
RW software for more informa-
tion on finalization process.
• Depending on the recording sta-
tus, some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may
not be played on this unit.
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connect-
ed to vehicle's AUX-IN terminal,
you can switch to AUX-IN mode by
pressing CD/AUX button.
• With a CD loaded and AUX device
connected at the same time, this
button switches between AUX-IN
mode and CD mode.
✽
NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connect-
ed, you cannot switch to AUX-IN
mode.
• When the AUX device is discon-
nected while in AUX-IN mode, the
unit automatically switches its
mode to last selected mode (CD
mode or RADIO mode).
• The quality of sound may be
defected or distorted when the
unit's EQ (BASS/MID/TREBLE)
control and AUX device's EQ con-
trol are both enabled (not flat).
When you want to use the unit's
EQ control feature, disable the
AUX device's EQ control feature,
and vice versa.
• When using a portable audio
device connected to the power out-
let, noise may occur during play-
back. If this happens, use the
power source of the portable audio
device.
AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
Knowing your vehicle
1083
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc cur-
rently being played can be select-
ed using the track number.
• Press button once to skip for-
ward to the beginning of the next
track.
Press within a second after
playback begins to quickly move
backward through a CD.
If you press after more than a
second, it will take you to the
beginning of the track you are now
listening to.
3. FF/REW Button
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push
and hold the FF or REW button.
When you release the button, the
compact disc player will resume
playing.
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are current-
ly listening to, press the RPT but-
ton. To cancel, press it again.
• If you do not release RPT opera-
tion when the track ends, it will
automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until
you push the button again or turn
the Power OFF then ON.
5. CD SCAN Button
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN
button.
• Press the CD SCAN button again
within 10 sec. when you have
reached the desired track.
6. CD EJECT Button
When the button is pressed with a
CD loaded, the CD will eject.
Forcing to eject : To force to eject a
CD, press this button for more than 3
seconds.
(Do this only when a CD is jammed
and you can not eject it in the normal
way - e.g.) in case that you have
inserted 2 CDs by mistake)
7. RANDOM (RDM) Button
With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than
sequential order.
To use random, do the following:
Press the RDM button to listen to
recorded tracks in random
sequence. Press RDM again to can-
cel or turn the power OFF then ON.
The unit defaults to playing tracks in
sequential order.
3 109
Knowing your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
• To assure proper operation of the
unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-
perature within a normal range by
using the vehicle's air conditioning
or heating system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct
capacity.
• All stored bookmarks are all
erased when the car battery is dis-
connected or power to the vehicle
is lost. If this occurs, the book-
marks will have to be reset.
• This equipment is designed to be
used only in a 12 volt DC battery
system with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision
parts. Do not attempt to disassem-
ble or adjust any parts.
• Do not expose this equipment
(including the speakers and CD)
to water or excessive moisture.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAUTION
• Do not insert warped or poor
quality discs into the CD play-
er as damage to the unit may
occur.
• Do not insert anything like
coins into the player slot as
damage to the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. The play-
back mechanism may be dam-
aged if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything
to impact the audio system,
damage to the system mecha-
nisms could occur.
• Off-road or rough surface
driving may cause the com-
pact disc to skip. Do not use
the compact disc when driv-
ing in such conditions as
damage to the compact disc
face could occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to grab or pull
the compact disc out while the
disc is being pulled into the
audio unit by the self-loading
mechanism. Damage to the
audio unit and compact disc
could occur.
• Avoid using recorded com-
pact discs in your audio unit.
Original compact discs are
recommended for best
results.
WARNING
When driving your vehicle, be
sure to keep the volume of the
unit set low enough to allow you
to hear sounds coming from the
outside.
Knowing your vehicle
1103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. POWER ON-OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
2. AUDIO Select Button
3. BAND Select Button
4. SCAN Button
5. EQ Button
6. AUTO SEEK Select Button
7. TUNE Select/AUDIO Control knob
8. PRESET STATION Select Buttons
LD 445MP3 NA
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (M445MP3) (IF EQUIPPED)
3 111
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. POWER ON-OFF Control
Knob
• The radio unit may be operated
when the ignition key is in the "ACC"
or "ON" position. Press the button to
switch the power on. The LCD
shows the radio frequency in the
radio mode or CD/MP3 track in the
CD/MP3 mode. To switch the power
off, press the button again.
• Push the FM/AM, TAPE or CD/MP3
to turn on that function without push-
ing the Power ON-OFF control knob.
VOLUME Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase
the volume and turn the knob coun-
terclockwise to reduce the volume.
2. AUDIO Select Button
Pressing the AUDIO button changes
the BASS, MID-RANGE, TREBLE,
FADER and BALANCE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the
display.
After selecting each mode, rotate the
Audio control knob clockwise or
counterclockwise.
BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease
the BASS, rotate the knob counter-
clockwise.
MID-RANGE Control
To increase the MID-RANGE, rotate
the knob clockwise, while to decrease
the MID-RANGE, rotate the knob
counterclockwise.
TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the
knob clockwise, while to decrease
the TREBLE, rotate the knob coun-
terclockwise.
FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to
emphasize rear speaker sound (front
speaker sound will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, front speaker
sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to empha-
size right speaker sound (left speak-
er sound will be attenuated).
When the control knob is turned
counterclockwise, left speaker sound
will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
3. BAND Select Button
Pressing the FM/AM button changes
the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The
mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
4. SCAN Button
When you press the button, frequen-
cy is changed and the next channel
is received automatically.
To stay on a station, press the SCAN
button again.
5. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the
CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and
OFF MODE for the desired tone
quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
Knowing your vehicle
1123
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6. AUTO SEEK Select Button
(Automatic Channel Selection)
Press the AUTO SEEK select button.
When the side is pressed, the
unit will automatically tune to the
next higher frequency and when the
side is pressed, it will automati-
cally tune to the next lower frequen-
cy.
7. TUNE Select/Audio Control
Knob
Rotate the knob clockwise to
increase the frequency and turn the
knob counterclockwise to reduce the
frequency.
8. PRESET STATION Select
Buttons
Six stations for AM, FM1 and FM2
respectively can be preset in the
electronic memory circuit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS
Six AM and twelve FM stations may
be programmed into the memory of
the radio. Then, by simply pressing
the AM/FM band select button and/or
one of the six station select buttons,
you may recall any of these stations
instantly. To program the stations, fol-
low these steps:
• Press AM/FM selector to set the
band for AM, FM1 and FM2.
• Select the desired station to be
stored by seek or manual tuning.
• Determine the preset station select
button you wish to use to access
that station.
• Press and hold the station select
button for more than 0.8 seconds. A
select button indicator will show in
the display indicating which select
button you have depressed.The fre-
quency display will flash after it has
been stored in to the memory. You
should then release the button, and
proceed to program the next
desired station. A total of 18 stations
can be programmed by selecting
one AM and two FM stations per
button.
• When completed, any preset sta-
tion may be recalled by selecting
AM, FM1 or FM2 band and the
appropriate station button.
CAUTION
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. The play-
back mechanism may be dam-
aged if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything
to impact the audio system,
damage to the system mecha-
nisms could occur.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
3 113
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. AUDIO/MP3 CD or AUX Select Button
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
3. FF/REW Button
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
5. RANDOM (RDM) Button
6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button
7. SCROLL Button
8. EQ Button
9. CD EJECT Button
10. CD SCAN Button
11. FILE SEARCH Knob
(TUNE Select Knob)
12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR) Button
LD 445MP3 NA
COMPACT DISC PLAYER (M455MP3) (IF EQUIPPED) - COMPATIBLE WITH MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE
Knowing your vehicle
1143
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. AUDIO/MP3 CD or AUX
Select Button
AUDIO/MP3 CD Select
• Insert the CD with the label facing
upward.
• Insert the CD to start CD playback,
during radio operation.
• If you press the CD/AUX button
while a disc is in the CD deck, the
CD player will begin playing even if
the radio or cassette player is
being used.
• The CD/AUX player can be used
when the ignition switch is in either
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
• Push the CD/AUX button to turn on
that function without pushing the
Power ON-OFF control knob.
✽
NOTICE
• Do not stick paper or tape etc., on the
label side or the recording side of any
discs, as it may cause a malfunction.
• The unit can play a multi-session
CD-R (recordable CD) and CD-
RW (rewritable CD) that consists
of more than two sessions.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Please refer to the manual of CD-
R/CD-RW recoder or CD-R/CD-
RW software for more informa-
tion on finalization process.
• Depending on the recording sta-
tus, some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may
not be played on this unit.
✽
NOTICE
Playback of MP3, AAC and WMA
file formats are supported. Load to
play time for these formats may be
longer due to the compressed nature
of these discs.
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connect-
ed to vehicle's AUX-IN terminal,
you can switch to AUX-IN mode by
pressing CD/AUX button.
• With a CD loaded and AUX device
connected at the same time, this
button switches between AUX-IN
mode and CD mode.
✽
NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connected,
you cannot switch to AUX-IN
mode.
• When the AUX device is discon-
nected while in AUX-IN mode, the
unit automatically switches its
mode to last selected mode (CD
mode or RADIO mode).
• The quality of sound may be defect-
ed or distorted when the unit's EQ
(BASS/MID/TREBLE) control and
AUX device's EQ control are both
enabled (not flat). When you want
to use the unit's EQ control feature,
disable the AUX device's EQ con-
trol feature, and vice versa.
• When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.
AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
3 115
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2. TRACK UP/DOWN Button
• The desired track on the disc cur-
rently being played can be select-
ed using the track number.
• Press button once to skip for-
ward to the beginning of the next
track.
Press within a second after
playback begins to quickly move
backward through a CD.
If you press after more than a
second, it will take you to the
beginning of the file you are now
listening to.
3. FF/REW Button
If you want to fast forward or reverse
through the compact disc track, push
and hold the FF or REW button.
When you release the button, the com-
pact disc player will resume playing.
4. REPEAT (RPT) Button
• To repeat the track you are current-
ly listening to, press the RPT but-
ton. To cancel, press it again.
• To repeat the music within selected
folder, press the RPT button for
more than 0.8 seconds. To cancel,
press it again. (MP3 CD only)
• If you do not release RPT opera-
tion when the track ends, it will
automatically be replayed.
This process will be continued until
you push the button again or turn
the power OFF then ON.
5. RANDOM (RDM) Button
With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than
sequential order.
To use random, do the following:
• Press the RDM button to listen to
recorded tracks in random
sequence. Press RDM again to
cancel or turn the power OFF then
ON. The unit defaults to playing
tracks in sequential order.
• To listen to the music within the
selected folder in random order,
press the RDM button within a sec-
ond. To cancel, press it again or
turn the power OFF then ON. (MP3
CD only)
6. BOOKMARK (MARK) Button
When the CD player unit is operat-
ing, the desired track on the disc can
be bookmarked by using the MARK
button. (MP3 CD only)
• Press the MARK button for more
than 0.8 seconds to bookmark the
desired track.
“M” will be displayed on the LCD
and “MEMORY(1~50)” will display
for approximately five seconds with
beep sound.
To play a bookmarked track, press
the MARK button within 0.8 sec-
onds and select the bookmarked
track to play.
• To erase a bookmarked track,
press the MARK button for more
than 0.8 seconds. The unit will
beep once when the bookmark is
erased.
✽
NOTICE
Tracks stored on Mark Memory will
be automatically erased after you
eject CDs that contain those tracks.
Knowing your vehicle
1163
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
7. SCROLL Button
Press the button, and you can check
the file names with more than 16
characters on MP3 CD (max 34
characters.).
The button doesn’t work on file
names less than 16 characters.
8. EQ Button
Press the EQ button to select the
CLASSIC, POPS, ROCK, JAZZ and
OFF MODE for the desired tone
quality. Each press of the button
changes the display as follows;
9. CD EJECT Button
When the button is pressed with a
CD loaded, the CD will eject.
Forcing to eject : To force to eject a
CD, press this button for more than 3
seconds.
(Do this only when a CD is jammed
and you can not eject it in the normal
way - e.g.) in case that you have
inserted 2 CDs by mistake)
10. CD SCAN Button
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track, press the CD SCAN
button more than 0.8 seconds.
• To playback the first 10 seconds of
each track in the selected folder,
press the CD SCAN button within
0.8 seconds. (MP3 CD only)
• Press the CD SCAN button again
within 10 sec. when you have
reached the desired track.
11. FILE SEARCH Knob
(TUNE Select Knob)
• You can skip the track (file) by turn-
ing the FILE SEARCH knob clock-
wise or counterclockwise.
After selecting the desired track
(file), press the FILE SEARCH
knob to playback the track (file).
If you do not press the FILE
SEARCH knob within five seconds,
the search will stop.
12. DIRECTORY SEARCH (DIR)
Button
• You can move through the folder by
pushing the DIR button to up ( )
and down( ).
• After moving the desired folder,
press the FILE SEARCH knob to
play back in the selected folder. If
you do not press the FILE
SEARCH knob within 5 seconds,
the folder searching function will be
released. It can not be operated in
a single folder.
CLASSIC➟POPS➟ROCK➟JAZZ➟OFF
3 117
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
✽
NOTICE
• To assure proper operation of the
unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-
perature within a normal range by
using the vehicle's air conditioning
or heating system.
• When replacing the fuse, replace it
with a fuse having the correct
capacity.
• All stored bookmarks are all
erased when the car battery is dis-
connected or power to the vehicle
is lost. If this occurs, the book-
marks will have to be reset.
• This equipment is designed to be
used only in a 12 volt DC battery
system with negative ground.
• This unit is made of precision
parts. Do not attempt to disassem-
ble or adjust any parts.
• Do not expose this equipment
(including the speakers and tape)
to water or excessive moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not insert warped or poor
quality discs into the CD play-
er as damage to the unit may
occur.
• Do not insert anything like
coins into the player slot as
damage to the unit may occur.
• Do not place beverages close
to the audio system. The play-
back mechanism may be dam-
aged if you spill them.
• Do not strike or allow anything
to impact the audio system,
damage to the system mecha-
nisms could occur.
• Off-road or rough surface
driving may cause the com-
pact disc to skip. Do not use
the compact disc when driv-
ing in such conditions as
damage to the compact disc
face could occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to grab or pull
the compact disc out while the
disc is being pulled into the
audio unit by the self-loading
mechanism. Damage to the
audio unit and compact disc
could occur.
• Avoid using recorded com-
pact discs in your audio unit.
Original compact discs are
recommended for best
results.
WARNING
When driving your vehicle, be
sure to keep the volume of the
unit set low enough to allow you
to hear sounds coming from the
outside.
Knowing your vehicle
1183
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LD 600 NA
1,2. Power on /off and volume control button
3. Radio selection button
4. Scan Button
5. Automatic station selection button (Seek)
6. Manual station selection button (Tune)
7. Pre-set button
8. LCD Display
9. Bass control/ left, right audio control
RADIO AND AUDIO QUALITY/VOLUME CONTROL, EQ (HMP600) (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Power on/off and volume
control button
When the ignition switch is on ACC
or ON, push this button to power on.
Push this button again to power off.
2. Volume control button
Rotate this button clockwise to vol-
ume up and anti-clockwise to volume
down.
3. Radio selection button
(FM/AM)
Push [FM/AM] button for FM or AM
radio. Each press will change
FM1
➟FM2➟AM➟FM1 and repeats.
4. Scan button
Push this button to automatically
select available stations and remains
for 5 seconds from current station.
Push again to stay on current station.
BSM button
Push [BSM] button to start automatic
search from current station. The sta-
tions are memorized in 1~6 pre-set
buttons from smallest station.
Number 1 pre-set station will be on
after the search and memory.
5. Automatic station selection
button (Seek)
Push [seek ] button, to increase
the band and [seek ] button to
decrease the band. It automatically
finds available station. If the station is
already memorized in pre-set memo-
ry, it will show the pre-set number.
6. Manual station selection
button (Tune)
Rotate this tune button clockwise 1
click to increase band 1 step and
anti-clockwise to decrease.
Regular export
• FM: Move by 0.1MHz
(87.5
➟ 87.6➟ 87.7····87.7➟ 87.6
➟87.5)
• AM: Move by 9 KHz
(531
➟540➟549····549➟540➟531)
North America export (Columbian
units FM move by 0.1 MHz)
• FM: Move by 0.2MHz
(87.5
➟ 87.7➟ 87.9····87.9➟ 87.7
➟87.5)
• AM: Move by 10 KHz
(530
➟540➟550····550➟540➟530)
7. Pre-set button (1~6)
Push these buttons to listen to mem-
orized stations. Push pre-set button
for more than 1.5 seconds (with a
beep) to memorize current station.
8. LCD display
It indicates FM1/FM2/AM along with
current band, pre-set channel, FM
stereo with "ST".
3 119
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Knowing your vehicle
1203
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9. Bass control/ left, right
audio control
Push this button to select BASS➟
MIDDLE➟ TREBBLE➟ FADER➟
BALANCE on LCD display screen.
Rotate the volume button
clockwise to increase
high sound and anti-
clockwise to decrease
high sound.
Rotate the volume button
clockwise to enable right
speakers and anti-clock-
wise to enable left speak-
ers.
Rotate the volume button
clockwise to increase
back speaker sound and
anti-clockwise to increa-
se front speaker sound.
TREBLE
BALANCE
FADER
Rotate the volume button
clockwise to increase
Bass sound and anti-
clockwise to decrease
Bass sound.
Rotate the volume button
clockwise to increase
middle sound and anti-
clockwise to decrease
Middle sound.
BASS
MIDDLE
3 121
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.CD loading slot
2.CD load button
3.CD eject button
4. LCD Display
5.CD/AUX selection button
6.CD change button
7,8.Fast Backward and Fast Forward button
9.Previous track automatic selection button
10. Next track automatic selection button
11.Repeat button
12.SCAN button
13.MARK button
14.RDM button
15.FILE search knob
16.SCROLL button
17.Directory search button
LD 600NA
MP3 CDC (HMP600) (IF EQUIPPED)
Knowing your vehicle
1223
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. CD loading slot
Push [LOAD] button to open CD slot.
Please face printed side upward and
gently push in. This CDC supports
only 12 cm CDs.
2. CD load button
Pressing the "LOAD" button opens
an empty tray of lowest order in the
CDC deck. When a CD is loaded, the
slot closes and the CD plays. To load
CDs in all empty slots, press the
"LOAD" button for more than 1.5 sec-
onds. Be sure to insert only one CD
into slot at a time. Then, lastly loaded
CD is played. If you do not load CDs
or press any button for 10 seconds
after pressing the "LOAD" button, the
LOAD function will be canceled.
3. CD eject button
Push button to eject the CD dur-
ing CD playback. Push this button for
more than 1.5 seconds to eject all
the CDs. If CD number 3 is currently
playing, ejecting order is 3,4,5,6,1,2.
4. LCD display
It indicates location of CD in CD
deck. When loading and ejecting CD,
corresponding CD indicator number
blinks.
5. CD/AUX selection button
CD Select
When power is off while CD is loaded
or radio/AUX is playing, push [CD]
button to play CDC. When there is no
available CD, "no disc" message will
be indicated for 2 seconds and
returns to previous mode.
AUX-IN Select
• When the AUX device (such as
portable MP3 players) is connect-
ed to vehicle's AUX-IN terminal,
you can switch to AUX-IN mode by
pressing CD/AUX button.
• With a CD loaded and AUX device
connected at the same time, this
button switches between AUX-IN
mode and CD mode.
AUX 3.5mm STEREO MINI PLUG
✽
NOTICE
• If the AUX device is not connect-
ed, you cannot switch to AUX-IN
mode.
• When the AUX device is discon-
nected while in AUX-IN mode, the
unit automatically switches its
mode to last selected mode (CD
mode or RADIO mode).
• The quality of sound may be
defected or distorted when the
unit's EQ (BASS/MID/TREBLE)
control and AUX device's EQ con-
trol are both enabled (not flat).
When you want to use the unit's
EQ control feature, disable the
AUX device's EQ control feature,
and vice versa.
6. CD change button
Push [DISC ] button to change to
next CD (From CD 1 to CD 2).
Push [DISC ] button to change to
previous CD (From CD 2 to CD 1). If
changer is not fully load, the
changes will be next available CD.
7. Fast Backward button
During CD playback, push [REW]
button to fast backward. For first 5
seconds 5X and 15X after 5 sec-
onds. While the button is pressed
sound is reduced to 12dB.
8. Fast Forward button
During CD playback, push [FF] but-
ton to fast forward. For first 5 sec-
onds 5X and 15X after 5 seconds.
While the button is pressed sound is
reduced to 12dB.
9. Previous track automatic
selection button
Push [TRACK ] button to go to
beginning of currently playing track.
Push again to move to beginning of
previous track.
10. Next track automatic selec-
tion button
Push [SEEK ] button to go to move
to beginning of next track.
11. Repeat button
Push [RPT] button to repeat current
track. Push again to disable.
12. SCAN button
Push [SCAN] button to listen each
track for 10 seconds. Push again to
disable.
13. Book Mark button
This is selecting desired tracks.
Select desired tracks and push
[MARK] button for more than 2 sec-
onds. [M] symbol will be indicated
and push for within 1 second to play
[M] selected tracks.
14. RDM button
This button randomly selects track.
✽
NOTICE
Using CD-R/CD-RW, it may not be
played according to CD manufac-
turer, or how it was created. If it
does not play, please avoid using it.
It could cause problems on the sys-
tem.
15. File search knob
Turn knob left and right to change
track. Push within 5 seconds to play
selected track. It will return to cur-
rently playing track number after 5
seconds.
16. Scroll button
If the tile is too long for MP3/WMA
files, push [SCROLL] button to indi-
cate on LCD display screen.
17. Directory search button
For MP3/WMA files, if there are more
than 2 directories in a CD, push
[Directory Search] buttons to search.
Select desired directory and use
"File Search knob" to search file.
Push "File Search knob" within 5
seconds otherwise it will go back to
current playing track.
3 123
Knowing your vehicle
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Ignition switch / 4-2
Starting the engine / 4-4
Manual transaxle / 4-5
Automatic transaxle / 4-6
Brake system / 4-11
Steering wheel / 4-18
Cruise control / 4-21
Traction control system / 4-25
Instrument cluster / 4-28
Gauges / 4-29
Warnings and indicators / 4-31
Lighting / 4-39
Wipers and washers / 4-43
Defroster / 4-45
Hazard warning flasher / 4-46
Manual climate control system / 4-47
Windshield defrosting and defogging / 4-56
Driving your vehicle
Driving your vehicle
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Illuminated ignition switch
Whenever a door is opened, the igni-
tion switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition
switch is not in the ON position. The
light will go off approximately 30 sec-
onds after closing the door or when
the ignition switch is turned on.
Ignition switch and anti-theft
steering column lock
Ignition switch position
LOCK
The steering wheel locks to protect
against theft. The ignition key can be
removed only in the LOCK position.
When turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position, push the key
inward at the ACC position and turn
the key toward the LOCK position.
ACC (Accessory)
The steering wheel is unlocked and
electrical accessories are operative.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is
the normal running position after the
engine is started.
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if
the engine is not running to prevent
battery discharge.
START
Turn the ignition key to the START
position to start the engine. The
engine will crank until you release
the key; then it returns to the ON
position. The brake warning lamp
can be checked in this position.
✽
NOTICE
If difficulty is experienced in turn-
ing the ignition key to the START
position, turn the steering wheel
right and left to release resistance
and then turn the key.
IGNITION SWITCH
1LDA3012
OUN036002
43
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
WARNING - Ignition key
• Never turn the ignition switch
to LOCK or ACC while the
vehicle is moving. This would
result in loss of directional
control and braking function,
which could cause an immedi-
ate accident.
• The anti-theft steering column
lock is not a substitute for the
parking brake. Before leaving
the driver’s seat, always make
sure the shift lever is engaged
in 1st gear for manual
transaxle or P (Park) for auto-
matic transaxle, set the park-
ing brake fully and shut the
engine off. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement
may occur if these precau-
tions are not taken.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Never reach for the ignition
switch, or any other controls
through the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control, an
accident and serious bodily
injury or death.
• Do not place any movable
objects around the driver’s
seat as they may move while
driving, interfere with the driv-
er and lead to an accident.
Driving your vehicle
44
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Manual Transaxle - Depress the
clutch pedal fully and shift the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the
clutch pedal depressed while turn-
ing the ignition switch to the start
position. The starter will not oper-
ate if the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine
when the shift lever is in the N
(Neutral) position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to START
and hold it there until the engine
starts (a maximum of 10 seconds),
then release the key.
4. In extremely cold weather (below
-18°C / 0°F) or after the vehicle
has not been operated for several
days, let the engine warm up with-
out depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without
depressing the accelerator.
The starter will not operate if:
• Manual Transaxle - the clutch
pedal is not fully depressed.
• Automatic Transaxle - the shift
lever is NOT in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.
STARTING THE ENGINE
CAUTION
If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position. If traffic and
road conditions permit, you may
put the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position while the
vehicle is still moving and turn
the ignition switch to the START
position in an attempt to restart
the engine.
WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels,
ski boots,etc.) may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedal,
and the clutch (if equipped).
CAUTION
Do not engage the starter for
more than 10 seconds. If the
engine stalls or fails to start,
wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
engaging the starter. Improper
use of the starter may damage
it.
45
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Manual transaxle operation
The manual transaxle has five for-
ward gears.
Press the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
A special safety feature prevents
inadvertent shifting from 5 (Fifth) to
R (Reverse). The gearshift lever must
be returned to the neutral position
before shifting into R (Reverse).
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
“labor’’. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you again need to
increase your speed. When the vehi-
cle is traveling down steep hills,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OLD046003N
WARNING - Manual
transaxle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always set the parking brake
fully and shut the engine off.
Then make sure the transaxle is
shifted into 1st gear on level or
uphill ground or into R
(Reverse) gear on downhill
ground. Unexpected and sud-
den vehicle movement can
occur if these precautions are
not followed in the order identi-
fied.
CAUTION
To avoid premature clutch wear
and damage, do not drive with
your foot resting on the clutch
pedal. Also, don’t use the clutch
to hold the vehicle stopped on
an upgrade, while waiting for a
traffic light, etc.
Driving your vehicle
64
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
OLD036019N
The lock release button must be depressed while moving the shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting.
The shift lever can be moved without depressing the lock release button.
Lock release button
Prevents shift lever movement
without first depressing the button.
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transaxle operation
All normal forward driving is done
with the shift lever in the D (Drive)
position.
To move the shift lever from the P
(Park) position, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the lock release
button must be depressed.
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
WARNING - Automatic
transaxle
Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in the P (PARK) position; then
set the parking brake fully and
shut the engine off. Unexpected
and sudden vehicle movement
can occur if these precautions
are not followed in the order
identified.
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to your
transaxle, do not accelerate
the engine in R (Reverse) or
any forward gear position with
the brakes on.
• When stopped on an upgrade,
do not hold the vehicle sta-
tionary with engine power.
Use the service brake or the
parking brake.
• Do not shift from N (Neutral)
or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R
(Reverse) when the engine is
above idle speed.
Driving your vehicle
84
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Transaxle ranges
P (park)
This position locks the transaxle and
prevents the front wheels from rotat-
ing. Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into this position.
R (reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (neutral)
With the gearshift in the N position,
the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
(Continued)
• Before leaving the driver’s
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (PARK)
position. Set the parking
brake fully, shut the engine off
and take the key with you.
Unexpected and sudden vehi-
cle movement can occur if you
do not follow these precau-
tions in the order specified.
WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion will cause
the drive wheels to lock which
will cause you to lose control
of the vehicle.
• Do not use the P (Park) posi-
tion in place of the parking
brake. Always make sure the
shift lever is latched in the P
(Park) position so that it can-
not be moved unless the lock
release button is pushed in,
AND set the parking brake
fully.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transaxle if you shift into R
while the vehicle is in motion,
except as explained in “Rocking
the Vehicle”, in this manual.
CAUTION
The transaxle may be damaged
if you shift into P (Park) while
the vehicle is in motion.
49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
D (drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a 4-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transaxle will auto-
matically downshift to the next lower
gear.
✽
NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
3 (Third Gear)
Move shift lever to this position for
towing a trailer during hill climbing.
This position also provides engine
braking when going down hills.
2 (Second Gear)
Use 2 (Second Gear) for more power
when climbing hills and for increased
braking when going down hills. This
position also helps reduce wheel
spin on slippery surfaces. When the
shift lever is placed in 2 (Second
Gear), the transaxle will automatical-
ly shift from first to second gear.
L (Low)
Move the shift lever to this position in
hard pulling situations and for climb-
ing steep grades.
CAUTION
Do not exceed the recommend-
ed maximum speeds in 2
(Second Gear) or L (Low).
Operating the vehicle at speeds
above the maximum recom-
mended, for 2 (Second Gear) or
L (Low) may cause excessive
heat to develop which could
result in damage to or failure of
the automatic transaxle.
Driving your vehicle
104
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Moving up a steep grade from
a standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the Automatic
Transaxle has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transaxle
out of P (Park) unless the brake
pedal is depressed.
To shift the transaxle out of P (Park):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the ignition
to the ON position.
3. Depress the lock release button
and move the shift lever.
When the ignition switch is in the
LOCK position, the transaxle cannot
be shifted from P (Park).
Ignition key interlock system
The ignition key cannot be removed
unless the shift lever is in the P
(Park) position. If the ignition switch
is in any other position, the key can-
not be removed.
WARNING
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in or
around the car.
411
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING
- Parking brake
Applying the parking brake
while the vehicle is moving at
normal speeds can cause a sud-
den loss of control of the vehi-
cle. If you must use the parking
brake to stop the vehicle, use
great caution in applying the
brake.
WARNING - Brakes
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, exces-
sive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear
and avoid continuous applica-
tion of the brakes. Continuous
brake application will cause
the brakes to overheat and
could result in a temporary
loss of braking performance.
(Continued)
Driving your vehicle
124
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Disc brakes wear indicator
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
When your brake pads are worn and
it's time for new pads, you will hear a
high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes (if
equipped). You may hear this sound
come and go or it may occur when-
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
WARNING - Brake wear
This brake wear warning sound
means your vehicle needs serv-
ice. If you ignore this audible
warning, you will eventually lose
braking performance, which
could lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
Always replace brake pads as
complete front or rear axle sets.
(Continued)
• Wet brakes may result in the
vehicle not slowing down at
the usual rate and pulling to
one side when the brakes are
applied. Applying the brakes
lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this
way. Always test your brakes
in this fashion after driving
through deep water. To dry the
brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe for-
ward speed until brake per-
formance returns to normal.
CAUTION
To avoid costly brake repairs,do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.
413
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake
To engage the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and then without
pressing the release button in, pull
the parking brake lever up as far as
possible. In addition it is recommend-
ed that when parking the vehicle on
a gradient, the shift lever should be
positioned in the appropriate low
gear on manual transaxle vehicles or
in the P (Park) position on automatic
transaxle vehicles.
To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking brake lever slightly.
Secondly, depress the release button
and lower the parking brake lever
while holding the button.
✽
NOTICE
If you depress the release button
without pulling up the parking
brake lever, you will not be able to
release the parking brake.
WARNING - Parking brake
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the gearshift lever in place of
the parking brake. Set the
parking brake AND make sure
the gearshift lever is securely
positioned in 1st (First) gear
or R (Reverse) for manual
transaxle equipped vehicles
and in P (Park) for automatic
transaxle equipped vehicles.
• Never allow a person who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle or
children to touch the parking
brake. If the parking brake is
released unintentionally, seri-
ous injury may occur.
OLD036031
OLD036030
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake
applied will cause excessive
brake pad and brake rotor wear.
Driving your vehicle
144
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Parking on curbed streets
• When parking your vehicle on an
uphill grade, park as close to the
curb as possible and turn the front
wheels away from the curb so that
the front wheels will contact the
curb if the vehicle moves back-
ward.
• When parking your vehicle on a
downhill grade, park as close to the
curb as possible and turn the front
wheels toward the curb so that the
front wheels will contact the curb if
the vehicle moves forward.
W-75
415
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
(if equipped)
The ABS system continuously sens-
es the speed of the wheels. If the
wheels are going to lock, the ABS
system repeatedly modulates the
hydraulic brake pressure to the
wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS system is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS system in an
emergency situation, do not attempt
to modulate your brake pressure and
do not try to pump your brakes.
Press your brake pedal as hard as
possible or as hard as the situation
warrants and allow the ABS system
to control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
WARNING - ABS Brakes
Your ABS is not a substitute for
good driving judgement. You
can still have an accident. In
fact, your ABS system will prob-
ably not be able to prevent an
accident in the following driving
conditions:
• Dangerous driving, such as
neglecting safety precautions,
speeding, or driving too close
to the vehicle in front of you.
• Driving at high speed in situa-
tions providing considerably
less traction, such as wet con-
ditions where hydroplaning
could occur.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Driving too fast on poor road
surfaces.The ABS is designed
to improve maximum braking
effectiveness on typical high-
ways and roads in good con-
dition. On poor road surfaces
in poor condition, the ABS
may actually reduce braking
effectiveness.
Driving your vehicle
164
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
ABS
W-78
CAUTION
• If the ABS warning light is on
and stays on, you may have a
problem with the ABS system.
In this case, however, your reg-
ular brakes will work normally.
• The ABS warning light will stay
on for approximately 3 sec-
onds after the ignition switch
is ON. During that time, the
ABS will go through self-diag-
nosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the
light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS sys-
tem. Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
• When you drive on a road hav-
ing poor traction, such as an
icy road, and operate your
brakes continuously, the ABS
will be active continuously
and the ABS warning light
may illuminate. Pull your car
over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
•Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
417
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
✽
NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS is malfunc-
tioning.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Driving your vehicle
184
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Power steering
Power Steering uses energy from the
engine to assist you in steering the
vehicle. If the engine is off or if the
power steering system becomes
inoperative, the vehicle may still be
steered, but it will require increased
steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the power
steering checked by an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
✽
NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below -10 °C/14 °F), the power
steering may require increased
effort when the engine is first start-
ed. This is caused by increased fluid
viscosity due to the cold weather and
does not indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing accelera-
tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm
then release or let the engine idle for
two or three minutes to warm up the
fluid.
STEERING WHEEL
CAUTION
• Never hold the steering wheel
against a stop (extreme right
or left turn) for more than 5
seconds with the engine run-
ning. Holding the steering
wheel for more than 5 sec-
onds in either position may
cause damage to the power
steering pump.
• If the power steering drive belt
breaks or if the power steering
pump malfunctions, the steer-
ing effort will greatly increase.
419
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Tilt steering (if equipped)
A tilt steering wheel allows you to
adjust the steering wheel before you
drive. You can also raise it to the
highest level to give your legs more
room when you exit and enter the
vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-
tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle,
pull down (
1
) the lock release lever,
adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (
2
), then pull up the
lock-release lever to lock the steering
wheel in place.
Be sure to adjust the steering wheel
to the desired position before driving.
WARNING
• Never adjust the angle of
steering wheel while driving.
You may lose your steering
control and cause severe per-
sonal injury or accidents.
• After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and
down to be certain it is locked
in position.
OLD026076
Driving your vehicle
204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
CAUTION
•To sound the horn, press the
area indicated by the horn
symbol on your steering
wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when
this area is pressed.
• Do not strike the horn severely
to operate it, or hit it with your
fist. Do not press on the horn
with a sharp-pointed object.
OLD026077
421
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without resting your
foot on the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 40 km/h (24
mph).
To set cruise control speed:
1. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF button
on the steering wheel, to turn the
system on. The CRUISE indicator
light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 40 km/h
(24 mph).
CRUISE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING - Cruise
control
Do not use the cruise control
feature under the following con-
ditions:
• Heavy or unsteady traffic
• Slippery or winding roads
• Situations that involve varying
speeds
• Pay particular attention during
the down-hill driving with
cruise control system as the
vehicle speed can be
increased gradually.
WARNING
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminated)
the cruise control can be
switched on accidentally. Keep
the cruise control system off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when cruise control is not in
use.
1LDN4024
Driving your vehicle
224
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3. Push down the SET/COAST switch,
and release it at the speed you
want.The “SET” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
Release the accelerator at the
same time. The desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
The SET function cannot be activated
until approximately 2 seconds after the
CRUISE ON-OFF button has been
engaged.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while going
downhill.
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Press the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral).
• Pull the CANCEL switch.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the “SET”
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go OFF), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, push up the
RES/ACC switch located on your
steering wheel.You will return to your
previously preset speed.
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button
(the CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go OFF).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To Set
Cruise Control Speed” on the previ-
ous page.
1LDN4025 1LDN4025A
423
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push up the RES/ACC switch and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the switch at the speed you
want.
• Push up the RES/ACC switch and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase 1.6 km/h (1
mph) by one touch and will be mem-
orized to the reset speed.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Push down the SET/COAST switch
and hold it. Your vehicle will gradu-
ally slow down. Release the switch
at the speed you want to maintain.
• Push down the SET/COAST switch
and release it immediately. The
cruising speed will decrease 1.6
km/h (1 mph) by one touch and will
be memorized to the reset speed.
1LDN4026 1LDN4025
Driving your vehicle
244
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To resume cruising speed at
more than 40 km/h (24 mph):
If any method other than the
CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used
to cancel cruising speed and the sys-
tem is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume
when the RES/ACC switch is pushed
up.
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
40km/h (24 mph).
1LDN4026
425
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
The Traction Control System (TCS)
helps the vehicle accelerate on slip-
pery road surfaces by preventing the
drive wheels from spinning exces-
sively. It also provides improved driv-
ing force and steering.
TCS operation
TCS ON condition
• When the ignition is turned
ON, TCS and TCS OFF
indicator light illuminate for
approximately 3 seconds,
then TCS is turned on.
• Press the TCS button to
turn TCS off. (TCS OFF
indicator will illuminate). To
turn the TCS on, press the
TCS button (TCS OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the TCS
performing an automatic
system self-check and does
not indicate a problem.
When operating
When the TCS is in opera-
tion, TCS indicator light
blinks.
• When the traction control
system is operating prop-
erly, you can feel a slight
pulsation in the vehicle.
This is only the effect of
brake control and indi-
cates nothing unusual.
• When moving out of mud
or driving on a slippery
road, pressing the accel-
erator pedal may not
cause the engine rpm
(revolutions per minute) to
increase.
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
-
TCS
OLD026118
Driving your vehicle
264
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TCS operation off
TCS OFF state
• To cancel TCS operation,
press the TCS button
(TCS OFF indicator light
illuminates).
• If the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK position
when TCS is off, TCS
remains off. Upon restart-
ing the engine, the TCS will
automatically turn on
again.
Indicator light
When ignition switch is turned to ON,
the indicator light illuminates, then
goes off if TCS system is operating
normally.
The TCS indicator light blinks when-
ever TCS is operating.
TCS OFF indicator light comes on
when either the TCS is turned off
with the button, or TCS fails to oper-
ate when turned on.
TCS
OFF
TCS
TCS
OFF
■ TCS indicator light (blinks)
■ TCS OFF indicator light (comes on)
WARNING
The Traction Control System is
only a driving aid; use precau-
tions for safe driving by slowing
down on curved, snowy, or icy
roads.
427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
TCS OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the TCS
turned on for daily driving whenev-
er possible.
• To turn TCS off while driving, press
the TCS button while driving on a
flat road surface.
Never press TCS button while TCS is
operating (TCS indicator light blinks).
If TCS is turned off while TCS is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
✽
NOTICE
• When measuring the vehicle speed
with a Chassis dynamometer,
make sure the TCS is turned off
(TCS OFF light illuminated). If
the TCS is left on, it may prevent
the vehicle speed from increasing,
and cause a false diagnosis of a
faulty speedometer.
• Turning the TCS off does not
affect ABS or brake system opera-
tion.
WARNING - TCS
Never press the TCS button
while TCS is operating.
If the TCS is turned off while
TCS is operating, the vehicle
may slip out of control.
To turn TCS off while driving,
press the TCS button while driv-
ing on a flat road surface.
Driving your vehicle
284
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Turn signal indicators
3. Speedometer
4. Engine temperature gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. Odometer / Tripmeter
7. Shift position indicator
(Automatic transaxle only)
8. Fuel gauge
*: if equipped
OLD028090C-C
429
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the for-
ward speed of the vehicle.
Odometer/Tripmeter
You can choose the odometer, trip-
meter A or tripmeter B by pressing
the TRIP button.
Odometer
The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
Tripmeter
TRIP A: Tripmeter A
TRIP B: Tripmeter B
The tripmeter indicates the distance
of individual trips selected by the
driver. Tripmeter A and B can be
reset to 0 by pressing the TRIP but-
ton for 1 second or more, and then
releasing.
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
The tachometer pointer may move
slightly when the ignition switch is in
ACC or ON position with the engine
OFF. This movement is normal and
will not affect the accuracy of the
tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
GAUGES
OLD026200L
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
Driving your vehicle
304
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Engine temperature gauge
This gauge shows the temperature
of the engine coolant when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to “Overheating” in the
Index.
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge indicates the approx-
imate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
Fuel tank capacity - 55 litres (14.52
US gal. ).
The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will illu-
minate when the fuel level has
dropped to about 8.5 liters (2.25 US
gal.).
Instrument panel illumination
When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, rotate the illumina-
tion control knob to adjust the instru-
ment panel illumination intensity.
OLD026204N
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
431
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Warning lights / audible indi-
cators
Checking operation
All warning lights are checked by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). Any light that does
not illuminate should be checked by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
After starting the engine, check to
make sure that all warning lights are
off. If any are still on, this indicates a
situation that needs attention. When
releasing the parking brake, the
brake system warning light should go
off. The fuel warning light will stay on
if the fuel level is low.
Anti-lock brake sys-
tem (ABS) warning
light (if equipped)
This light illuminates if the key is
turned to ON and goes off in approx-
imately 3 seconds if the system is
operating normally.
If the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Electronic brake force
distribution (EBD)
system warning light
(if equipped)
If two warning lights illumi-
nate at the same time
while driving, your vehicle
has a problem with ABS
and EBD system.
In this case, your ABS system and
regular brake system may not work
normally. Have the vehicle checked
by an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
ABS
ABS
WARNING
If the both ABS and Brake warn-
ing lights are ON and stay ON,
your vehicle’s brake system will
not work normally. So you may
experience an unexpected and
dangerous situation during sud-
den braking. In this case, avoid
high speed driving and abrupt
braking. Have your vehicle
checked by Authorized Kia
Dealer as soon as possible.
Driving your vehicle
324
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Engine oil pressure
warning
This warning light indicates the
engine oil pressure is low.
If the warning light illuminates while
driving:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road
and stop.
2. With the engine off, check the
engine oil level. If the level is low,
add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available, call
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Charging system
warning
This warning light indicates a mal-
function of either the generator or
electrical charging system.
If the warning light comes on while
the vehicle is in motion:
1. Drive to the nearest safe location.
2. With the engine off, check the gen-
erator drive belt for looseness or
breakage.
3. If the belt is adjusted properly, a
problem exists somewhere in the
electrical charging system. Have
an Authorized Kia Dealer correct
the problem as soon as possible.
Safety belt warning
If the driver's lap/shoulder belt is not
fastened when the ignition switch is
turned ON, the safety belt warning
light and chime will activate for about
6 seconds. And if the lap/shoulder
belt is fastened when the ignition
switch is turned ON, the safety belt
warning light will blink for about 6
seconds.
If the lap/shoulder belt is unfastened
while the lap/shoulder belt is fas-
tened with the ignition switch ON, the
safety belt warning light will blink for
about 6 seconds and if the vehicle
speed exceeds 10 km/h the safety
belt warning light and chime will acti-
vate until it is fastened.
CAUTION
If the engine is not stopped
immediately, severe damage
could result.
433
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Shift pattern indicators
(if equipped)
The individual indicators illuminate to
show the automatic transaxle shift
lever selection.
Door ajar warning
This warning light illuminates when a
door is not closed securely with the
ignition in any position.
Immobilizer indicator
(if equipped)
This light illuminates when the immo-
bilizer key is inserted and turned to
the ON position to start the engine.
If this light turns off or blinks when
the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion before starting the engine, have
the system checked by an authorized
Kia Dealer.
Parking brake & brake
fluid warning
Parking brake warning
This light is illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch in the START or ON posi-
tion. The warning light should go off
when the parking brake is released.
Low brake fluid level warning
If the warning light remains on, it may
indicate that the brake fluid level in
the reservoir is low.
If the warning light remains on:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check
the brake fluid level immediately
and add fluid as required. Then
check all brake components for
fluid leaks.
Driving your vehicle
344
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3. Do not drive the vehicle if leaks
are found, the warning light
remains on or the brakes do not
operate properly. Have it towed to
any Authorized Kia Dealer for a
brake system inspection and nec-
essary repairs.
To check bulb operation, check
whether the parking brake and brake
fluid warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
Trunk lid open
warning (if equipped)
This warning light activates when the
trunk is not closed securely.
Stop the vehicle and close the lid.
Low fuel level
warning
This warning light indicates the fuel
tank is nearly empty. The warning
light will come on when the fuel level
has dropped to about 8.5 liters (2.25
US gal.). Refuel as soon as possible.
Headlight high beam
indicator
This indicator illuminates when the
headlights are on and in the high
beam position or when the turn sig-
nal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-
Pass position.
Front fog light indica-
tor (if equipped)
This light comes on when the front
fog lights are ON.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light on is dangerous. If the
brake warning light remains on,
have the brakes checked and
repaired immediately by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
435
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This indicator light is part of the
Engine Control System which moni-
tors various emission control system
components. If this light illuminates
while driving, it indicates that a
potential problem has been detected
somewhere in the emission control
system.
Generally, your vehicle will continue
to be drivable and will not need tow-
ing, but have the system checked by
an Authorized Kia Dealer as soon as
possible.
✽
NOTICE
A loose fuel filler cap may cause the
On Board Diagnostic System
Malfunction Indicator Light ( )
in the instrument panel to illuminate
unnecessarily. Always make sure
that the fuel filler cap is tight.
Air bag warning
(if equipped)
This warning light will blink or illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
each time you turn the ignition switch
to the ON position.
If this indicator does not go out, or if
it illuminates while the vehicle is
being driven, see an Authorized Kia
Dealer for immediate service.
CHECKCHECK
CHECK
CAUTION
• Prolonged driving with the
Emission Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light
( ) illuminated may cause
damage to the emission con-
trol systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
•
If the
Emission
Control System
Malfunction Indicator Light
( ) begins to flash ON and
OFF, potential catalytic con-
verter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power. Have the Engine
Control System inspected as
soon as possible by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
CHECKCHECK
CHECKCHECK
Driving your vehicle
364
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Auto cruise indicator
(if equipped)
CRUISE indicator
The indicator light illuminates when
the cruise control system is enabled.
SET indicator
The indicator light illuminates when
the cruise function switch (COAST/
SET or RES/ACCEL) is ON.
TCS indicator
(Traction Control
System) (if equipped)
The TCS indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approxi-
mately 3 seconds. When the TCS is
on, it monitors the driving conditions
and under normal driving conditions,
the TCS light will remain off. When a
slippery or low traction condition is
encountered, the TCS will operate,
and the TCS indicator will blink to
indicate the TCS is operating.
TCS OFF indicator
(if equipped)
The TCS OFF indicator will illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned
ON, but should go off after approxi-
mately 3 seconds. To switch to TCS
OFF mode, press the TCS button.
The TCS OFF indicator will illuminate
indicating the TCS is deactivated.
If this indicator stays on in the TCS
ON mode, the TCS may have a mal-
function. Take your car to the author-
ized Kia dealer and have the system
checked.
CRUISE
SET
TCS
TCS
OFF
437
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Key reminder warning chime
If the driver’s door is opened and the
ignition key is left in with the ignition
switch in the LOCK or ACC position,
the key reminder warning chime will
sound. This is to prevent you from
locking your keys in the vehicle.
Low tire pressure
telltale (if equipped)
The low tire pressure telltale comes
on for 3 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position.
If the warning light does not come
on, or continuously remains on after
coming on for about 3 seconds when
you turned the ignition switch to the
ON position, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
KIA dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate
if one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. You should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible. If the warning light illumi-
nates while driving, reduce vehicle
speed immediately and stop the
vehicle. Avoid hard braking and over-
correcting at the steering wheel.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire
information placard.
WARNING - Low tire pres-
sure
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
Driving your vehicle
384
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TPMS (Tire pressure
monitoring system)
malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
TPMS malfunction indicator comes
on for 3 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. If
the warning light does not come on,
or continuously remains on after
coming on for about 3 seconds when
you turned the ignition switch to the
ON position, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System is not working
porperly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
KIA dealer as soon as possible.
The warning light also comes on and
stays on when there is a problem
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System.
If this happens, the system may not
monitor the tire pressure. Have the
system checked by an authorized
KIA dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS
WARNING - Safe stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
439
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the small light when the
driver removes the ignition key and
opens the driver- side door.
• With this feature, the parklight will
be turned off automatically if the
driver parks on the side of road at
night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the ignition key is removed,
perform the following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parklights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parklight position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
➀
OFF position
➁
Parklight position
➂
Headlight position
Parklight position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
light position (1st position), the tail,
position, license and instrument
panel lights are ON.
LIGHTING
OLD026102OLD026101C
Driving your vehicle
404
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position (2nd position) the head,
tail, position, license and instrument
panel lights are ON.
High - beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
Flashing headlights
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low-beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
OLD026103 OLD026106 OLD026105
441
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Turn signals (A)
The ignition switch must be on for the
turn signals to function. To turn on
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down. Green arrow indicators on the
instrument panel indicate which turn
signal is operating. They will self-
cancel after a turn is completed. If
the indicator continues to flash after
a turn, manually return the lever to
the OFF position.
Lane change signals (B)
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position. The lever will return to the
OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be
burned out and will require replace-
ment.
✽
NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
Front fog light (if equipped)
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility and avoid acci-
dents when visibility is poor due to
fog, rain or snow etc. The fog lights
will turn on when fog light switch (1)
is turned to ON after the headlight
switch is turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the
switch to OFF.
1LDN2107 OLD026115
Driving your vehicle
424
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especial-
ly helpful after dawn and before sun-
set.
The DRL system will make your
headlights turn OFF when:
1. The head light switch is ON.
2. The parking brake engaged.
3. Engine stops.
CAUTION
When in operation, the fog
lights consume large amounts
of vehicle electrical power. Only
use the fog lights when visibility
is poor or unnecessary battery
and generator drain could
occur.
443
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the igni-
tion switch is turned ON.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
INT : Wiper operates intermittently
at the same wiping intervals.
Use this mode in a light rain or
mist. To vary the speed set-
ting, turn the speed control
knob (1).
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
: For a single wiping cycle, push
the lever forward and release it
with the lever in the OFF posi-
tion. The wipers will operate
continuously if the lever is
pushed upward and held.
✽
NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield,
defrost the windshield for about 10
minutes, or until the snow and/or ice
is removed before using the wind-
shield wipers to ensure proper oper-
ation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OLD026108N
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use gaso-
line, kerosene, paint thinner,
or other solvents on or near
them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
Driving your vehicle
444
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 2-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
Rear window wiper and wash-
er switch (if equipped)
The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
- Spraying washer fluid and wip-
ing
INT - Intermittent wiper operation
ON - Normal wiper opertion
- Spraying washer fluid and wip-
ing
OLD026109N
WARNING
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without 1st
warming the windshield with the
defrosters; the washer solution
could freeze on contact with the
windshield and obscure your
vision.
OLD027110N
CAUTION
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
445
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while engine is running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
console switch panel. The indicator
in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the defroster is ON.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside mirror defroster, it will be
operating at the same time when you
operate the rear window defroster.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after 20 minutes or
when the ignition switch is turned off.
To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.
DEFROSTER
OLD026116N
CAUTION
• To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments
or window cleaners contain-
ing abrasives to clean the win-
dow.
• To prevent the battery from
being discharged, operate the
defroster only while the
engine is running.
• If you want to defrost and
defog on the front windshield,
refer to “Windshield Defrosting
and Defogging” in this section.
Driving your vehicle
464
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The hazard warning flasher causes
the rear tail lights and front turn sig-
nal lights to flash on and off, which
serves as a warning to other drivers
to exercise caution when approach-
ing or passing your vehicle.
To activate the flasher, depress the
hazard warning flasher switch. This
switch operates in any ignition switch
position.
To turn the flashers off, depress the
switch again.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
OLD026100
447
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OLD026120N
1. Fan speed control knob
2. Mode selection knob
3. Temperature control knob
4. Rear window defroster button
5. Air intake control button
6. Air conditioning button (if equipped)
1
2
3
54
6
Driving your vehicle
484
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fan speed control knob
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for fan operation.
The fan speed control knob allows
you to control the fan speed of the air
flowing from the ventilation system.
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
Temperature control knob
The temperature control knob allows
you to control the temperature of the
air flowing from the ventilation sys-
tem. To change the air temperature in
the passenger compartment turn the
knob to the right for warm and hot air
or left for cooler air.
Mode selection knob
The mode selection knob controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
OLD026126N OLD026124 OLD026202N
449
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
MAX/ A/C position
When you select the MAX
A/C mode while the fan
speed is on, the follwing
system settings will be
made automatically;
• the air conditioning sys-
tem will be turned on.
• the recirculated air posi-
tion will be selected.
• the face mode will be
selected.
If you select MAX A/C
mode, you will not be able
to cancel the A/C system
operation, or change the
recirculated air mode posi-
tion.
Set the fan speed control
knob to desired speed and
rotate the temperature
control knob to the
extreme left position for
maximum cooling.
(outlet port: B, D)
MAX
A/C
OLD026121
Driving your vehicle
504
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Face position
Air flow is directed toward
the upper body and face.
Additionally, each outlet
can be controlled to direct
the air discharged from
the outlet.
(outlet port: B, D)
Face - floor position
Air flow is directed towards
the face and the floor. The
air to the floor is warmer
than the air to the face
(except when the temper-
ature control is set to the
extreme cold position).
(outlet port: B, D, C, E)
Floor position
Most of the air flow is
directed to the floor, with a
small amount of the air
being directed to the wind-
shield and side window
defroster.
(outlet port: C, E, A, D)
Floor - defrost position
Most of the air flow is
directed to the floor and
the windshield with a small
amount directed to the
side window defrosters.
(outlet port: A, C, E, D)
Defrost position
Most of the air flow is
directed to the windshield
with a small amount of air
directed to the side win-
dow defrosters.
(outlet port: A, D)
Instrument panel vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory,
check the instrument panel vents.
The outlet port (B, D) can be opened
or closed separately using the verti-
cal thumbwheel. To close the vent,
rotate it upward to the maximum
position. To open the vent, rotate it
downward.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
vertical or horizontal thumbwheels
as shown.
OLD026122
451
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Air intake control button
This is used to select outside (fresh)
air position or recirculated air posi-
tion.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button is illuminated when
the recirculated air posi-
tion is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
passenger compartment
will be drawn through the
heating system and heat-
ed or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button is not illuminated
when the outside (fresh)
air position is selected.
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OLD026125N
Driving your vehicle
524
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
✽
NOTICE
Prolonged use of the air condition-
ing with the “recirculated air posi-
tion” selected, will result in exces-
sively dry air in the passenger com-
partment.
Air conditioning button
(if equipped)
Push the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate). Push the button
again to turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off.
WARNING - Reciruclated
air
• Continued climate control
system operation in the recir-
culated air position may allow
humidity to increase inside
vehicle which may fog the
glass and obscure visibility.
• Continued climate control
system operation in the
reciruclated air position can
slightly reduce oxygen levels
which can lead to cause
drowsiness or sleepiness, and
loss of vehicle control. Set the
air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position as
much as possible while driv-
ing.
OLD026127
453
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
System Operation
Ventilation
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1. Set the mode to the position.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If cool air is desired at face level for
bi-level operation, set the mode to
the position.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
,
position.
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with environmentally friendly
R-134a refrigerant which is not dam-
aging to the ozone layer.
1. Start the engine. Push the air con-
ditioning button.
2. Set the mode to the position.
3. Set the air intake control to the
outside air or recirculated air posi-
tion.
4. Set the temperature control knob
to the desired position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
• If warmer air is desired at floor
level for bi-level operation, set the
mode to the position and
adjust the temperature control to
maintain maximum comfort.
Driving your vehicle
544
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control to the
extreme left position and set the air
intake control to the recirculated air
position, then set the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
✽
NOTICE
• When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the temperature
gauge closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating.
Continue to use the blower fan but
turn the air conditioning system
off if the temperature gauge indi-
cates engine overheating.
• With opening the windows in
humid weather air conditioning
may cause to make water drops.
Be careful because excessive water
drop may cause to damage electri-
cal equipment. In this case, close
the windows and turn on the air
conditioning system.
Air conditioning system oper-
ation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
windows on rainy humid days,
decrease the humidity inside the
vehicle by operating the air condi-
tioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed at idle as the air condition-
ing compressor cycles on. This is a
normal system operation charac-
teristics.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month if only for a few min-
utes to ensure maximum system
performance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristics.
• The air conditioning system
includes a function that automati-
cally turns the air conditioning
compressor off if engine coolant
temperature approaches an over
heating level. The air conditioning
compressor operation will resume
once engine coolant temperature
returns to the normal range. Also,
the air conditioning compressor is
automatically turned off for a few
seconds when the accelerator is
fully depressed (wide open throt-
tle).
• When operating the air condition-
ing system use the outside (fresh)
air position.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
does provide maximum cooling,
however, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
455
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a bad influence on the air condi-
tioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
Air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
WARNING - AC service
The air conditioning system
should be serviced by an
authorized Kia dealer. Improper
service may cause s erious
injury to the person performing
the service.
CAUTION
When the performance of the air
conditioning system is reduced
it is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and
refrigerant is used. Otherwise,
damage to the compressor and
abnormal system operation
may occur.
Driving your vehicle
564
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
To defog inside windshield
1. Select any fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected.
If the air-conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
To defrost outside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the
extreme hot position.
3. Select the position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air con-
ditioning will be selected.
If the air-conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the correspon-
ding button manually.
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
CAUTION - Windshield
heating
Do not use or position
during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the tempera-
ture of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob to the
position and fan speed control
knob to the lower speed.
OLD026139N OLD026140N
457
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving your vehicle
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor- defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up inside of the wind-
shield.
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake is controlled automatically
according to certain conditions such
as or position. To cancel or
return the defogging logic, do the fol-
lowing.
Manual climate control system
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to
the defrost position ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button
( ) at least 5 times within 3 sec-
onds.
The indicator light in the air intake
control button will blink 3 times with
0.5 second of interval. It indicates
that the defogging logic is canceled
or returned to the programmed sta-
tus.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
OLD026143N
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuel requirements / 5-2
Emission control system / 5-3
Before driving / 5-5
Suggestions for economical operation / 5-6
Special driving conditions / 5-7
Vehicle load limit / 5-11
Weight of the vehicle / 5-16
Trailer towing / 5-17
Label information / 5-25
Driving tips
Driving tips
25
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Gasoline engine (unleaded)
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to
use only unleaded fuel with a mini-
mum Octane Rating of 87 Anti-
Knock Index (AKI).
✽
NOTICE
NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The
use of leaded fuel is detrimental to
the catalytic converter and will
damage the engine control system’s
oxygen sensor and affect emission
control.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what Kia has specified. (Consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer for details.)
Gasoline containing alcohol
and methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
Vehicle damage or driveability prob-
lems may not be covered by the
manufacturer’s warranty if they result
from the use of:
1. Gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol.
2. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAUTION
Never use gasohol which con-
tains methanol. Discontinue use
of any gasohol product which
impairs drivability.
53
Driving tips
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Consumer Information
Manual in your vehicle.
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification of your Kia could affect
its performance, safety or durability,
may violate governmental safety and
emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modifi-
cation may not be covered under
warranty.
Engine exhaust gas precau-
tions (carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately by an authorized Kia
dealer. If you ever suspect exhaust
fumes are coming into your vehi-
cle, drive it only with all the win-
dows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to re-
start the engine may cause dam-
age to the emission control sys-
tem.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
following to avoid CO impair-
ment.
Driving tips
45
Operating precautions for cat-
alytic converters
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engine (unleaded).
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized Kia dealer.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Fire
A hot exhaust system can ignite
flammable items under your
vehicle. Do not park the vehicle
over or near flammable objects,
such as dry grass, paper,
leaves, etc.
55
Driving tips
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle:
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Section 7,
Maintenance.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes out.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Driving under
the influence of alcohol or
drugs
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Drunk driving is the num-
ber one contributor to the high-
way death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
You are much more likely to
have a serious accident if you
drink and drive.
If you are drinking or taking
drugs, don’t drive. Do not ride
with a driver who has been
drinking or taking drugs.
Choose a designated driver or
call a cab.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
drunk.
Driving tips
65
SUGGESTIONS FOR ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many kilometers (miles) you can get
from a liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Avoid lengthy warm-up idling.
Once the engine is running
smoothly, begin driving.
Remember, engine warm-up may
take a little longer on cold days.
• Save fuel by accelerating slowly
after stopping.
• Keep the engine in tune and follow
the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule. This will increase
the life of all parts and lower your
operating costs.
• Do not use the air conditioner
unnecessarily.
• Slow down when driving on rough
roads.
• For longer tire life and better fuel
economy, always keep the tires
inflated to the recommended pres-
sures.
• Maintain a safe distance from other
vehicles to avoid sudden stops.
This will reduce wear on brake lin-
ings and pads. Driving in such a
way will also save fuel because
extra fuel is required to accelerate
back to driving speed.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight
in the vehicle.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
needless wear, possible damage
to the brakes, and poor fuel econo-
my.
• Improper wheel alignment results
in faster tire wear and lower fuel
economy.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is less in crosswinds
and headwinds. To help offset
some of this loss, slow down when
driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Engine off
during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. Instead,
downshift to an appropriate
gear for engine braking effect.
57
Driving tips
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden movements in brak-
ing or steering.
• When braking, pump the brake
pedal with a light up-and-down
motion until the vehicle is stopped.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between 1 (First) and R
(Reverse) in vehicles equipped with
a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
and any forward gear in vehicles
equipped with an automatic
transaxle. Do not race the engine,
and spin the wheels as little as pos-
sible. If you are still stuck after a few
tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
tow vehicle to avoid engine overheat-
ing and possible damage to the
transaxle.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Downshifting
Downshifting with an automatic
transaxle, while driving on slip-
pery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when down-
shifting on slippery surfaces.
CAUTION
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine over-heating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal on
a vehicle equipped with ABS.
Driving tips
85
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat, explode
and injure bystanders.
CAUTION
The TCS system (if equipped)
should be turned OFF prior to
rocking the vehicle.
59
Driving tips
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Winter driving
• We recommend that you carry
emergency equipment, including a
window scraper, windshield de-
icer, a bag of sand or salt, flares, a
small shovel and jumper cables.
• Make sure you have sufficient eth-
ylene-glycol coolant in the radiator.
• Check the battery condition and
cables. Cold temperatures reduce
the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in excellent condition to
provide enough winter starting
power.
• Make sure the engine oil viscosity
is suitable for cold weather.
• Check the ignition system for loose
connections and damage.
• Use antifreeze-formulated wind-
shield washer fluid. (Do not use
engine coolant antifreeze.)
• Do not use the parking brake if it
might freeze. When parking, shift
to 1 (First) or R (Reverse) with a
manual transaxle or P (Park) with
an automatic transaxle and block
the rear wheels.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driving tips
105
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires.You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local and provincipal
regulations for possible restrictions
against their use.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Snow tire
size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affect-
ed.
511
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Tire and loading information
label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
385 kg (849 lbs)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
Without trailer brakes:
340 kg (750 lbs)
With trailer brakes:
680 kg (1500 lbs)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight, your vehicle can tow.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trail-
er.
OLD056900N
OLD056901N
Type A
Type B
Driving tips
125
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
(1400 lbs.), and there will be five
68 kg (150 lbs.) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load
capacity is 295 kg (650 lbs.).
(635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
WARNING - Load distribu-
tor
Your vehicle may become unsta-
ble while towing if your vehicle is
overloaded to one side. Make
sure that the load in the vehicle is
distributed equally to each side
of the centerline.
513
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
136 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2
(300 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
499 kg
Luggage weight (1100 lbs)
Example 1
ABC
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
340 kg
68 kg (150 lbs) × 5
(750 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
295 kg
Luggage weight (650 lbs)
ABC
Example 2
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 635 kg
Weight (1400 lbs)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
390 kg
78 kg (172 lbs) × 5
(860 lbs)
C
Available Cargo and
245 kg
Luggage weight (540 lbs)
ABC
Example 3
Driving tips
145
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Refer to your vehicle's tire and load-
ing information label for specific
information about your vehicle's
capacity weight and seating posi-
tions. The combined weight of the
driver, passengers and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle's capacity
weight.
Vehicle certification
The vehicle certification label is
located on the driver's door sill.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
OLD056901C
515
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
WARNING - Over loading
• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
cause an accident or vehicle
damage. You can calculate the
weight of your load by weigh-
ing the items (or people)
before putting them in the
vehicle. Be careful not to over-
load your vehicle.
• If you overload your vehicle,
the tires can suddenly and
without warning fail. The over-
loading can also make your
vehicle unstable and dramati-
cally increase braking dis-
tance.This could cause you to
lose control and crash.
WARNING - Loose cargo
Items you carry inside your
vehicle can strike and injure
occupants in a sudden stop or
sharp turn, or in a crash.
• Put items in the trunk of your
vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Never stack items, like suit-
cases, inside the occupant
compartment.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle,
since it can injure occupants
in a crash.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.
CAUTION
• Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would
not be covered by your war-
ranty. Do not overload your
vehicle.
• Using heavier suspension
components to get added
durability might not change
your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.ignored.
Driving tips
165
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WEIGHT OF THE VEHICLE
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the vehicle certification
label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
gers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the vehicle certification
label located on the driver’s door sill.
GCW (Gross combined weight)
This is the weight of the loaded vehi-
cle (GVW) plus the weight of the fully
loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross combined weight
rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer - including all cargo and pas-
sengers - that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important :
The towing vehicle's braking system
is rated for operation at GVWR, not
GCWR. Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of
towed vehicles and for trailers weigh-
ing an 340kg (750 lbs).) The GCW
must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum trailer weight
This is the highest possible weight of
a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo, and a
driver. The weight of other optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
your vehicle will reduce the maxi-
mum trailer weight your vehicle can
tow.
517
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Calculating the load your vehicle
can tow
1. Use the appropriate maximum
GCWR chart (in the Weight of the
Trailer section in this chapter) for
your type of drive system and
transmission.
2. Weigh your vehicle.
3. Subtract the weight of your vehicle
from the maximum GCWR in the
chart. This is the maximum trailer
weight your vehicle can tow. It
must be below the maximum trail-
er weight shown in the chart. Note
that the maximum trailer weight
your vehicle can tow depends on
the total weight of any cargo, pas-
sengers and available equipment
in the vehicle.
To identify what the vehicle trailering
capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in
“Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section. Remember that
trailering is different than just driving
your vehicle by itself. Trailering caus-
es major changes in handling, dura-
bility, and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering requires correct equip-
ment, and cautious driving.
WARNING - Towing a
trailer
If you don't use the correct
equipment or you drive improp-
erly, you can lose control when
you pull a trailer. For example, if
the trailer is too heavy, the
brakes may fail, and would at
least be ineffective to promptly
stop the vehicle. You and your
passenger could be seriously or
fatally injured. We do not recom-
mend towing a trailer. However,
in the event there is a need to
tow a trailer, such as in an emer-
gency, follow all the steps in this
section.
Item Specification
Maximum trailer Without trailer brakes 340 (750)
weight kg (lbs.) With trailer brakes 680 (1500)
TRAILER TOWING
CAUTION
Pulling a trailer improperly can
damage your vehicle and result
in costly repairs not covered by
your warranty.
Driving tips
185
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
This section contains many time-
tested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.
Load-pulling components such as
the engine, transaxle, wheel assem-
blies, and tires are forced to work
harder against the load of the added
weight. The engine is required to
operate at relatively higher speeds
and under greater loads. This addi-
tional burden generates extra heat
which creates more wear in engine,
and a shortened engine life. The trail-
er also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements.
If you do decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a hitch dealer about sway
control.
• After your odometer indicates 800
km (500 miles) or more, you can
tow a trailer. For the first 800 km
(500 miles) that you tow a trailer,
don’t drive over 80 km/h (50 mph)
and don’t make starts at full throt-
tle. This helps your engine and
other parts of your vehicle “wear” in
at the heavier loads.
• Always drive your vehicle at a mod-
erate speed (less than 100 km/h
(60 mph)).
• The important considerations have
to do with weight:
Weight of the trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be? It
should never weigh more than the
maximum trailer weight with trailer
brakes. But even that can be too
heavy.
If you feel that the trailer is adversely
affecting the movement of your vehi-
cle, reduce your speed, avoid
uneven or winding roads, avoid
roads with steep grades, and/or light-
en your trailer load.
519
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Weight of the trailer tongue
The tongue load of any trailer is an
important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle
since that is the trailer weight push-
ing down on the hitch on your vehi-
cle. The rest of the trailer weight is
sitting on the trailer's wheels.
The trailer tongue should weigh a
maximum of 10% of the total loaded
trailer weight.
After you've loaded the trailer, go to a
Weigh Station and weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to
see if the weights are proper. If they
aren’t, you may be able to correct
them simply by moving some items
around in the trailer.
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Do not attach a trailer hitch which
requires you to alter other parts on
your vehicle.
• Never make a hole in your vehicle
to accommodate a hitch.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
WARNING - Trailer bal-
ance
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.
• An improperly loaded trailer
can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Driving tips
205
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Safety chains
You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trail-
er. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufactur-
er or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recom-
mendation for attaching safety
chains. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your trail-
er. And, never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum weight for a trailer without
brakes, then the trailer needs its own
brakes. You must consult with a
knowledgeable and reputable trailer
vendor to determine which brake
equipped trailer is right for your
needs. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
Driving with a trailer
Towing a trailer requires experience.
You must gain that experience slow-
ly and carefully which practicing with
an unloaded or lightly loaded trailer.
Before setting out for the open road,
you must get to know your trailer.
Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the
vehicle you are driving is now a good
deal longer and not nearly so
responsive as your vehicle is by
itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and mirror adjustment. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start your vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply the
trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working.This lets
you check your electrical connection
at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and any trailer
brakes are still working.
WARNING
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolute-
ly certain that you have properly
set up the brake system. This is
not a task for amateurs. Use an
experienced, competent trailer
shop for this work.
521
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Following distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sud-
den turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trail-
er. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before
you can return to your lane.
Backing up
The trailer will go in the opposite
direction of the rear of your vehicle
when backing up. This is very difficult
for an inexperienced trailer driver to
get used to. To help you avoid mis-
takes, hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, just hold the
steering wheel firmly and move your
hand to the left. To move the trailer to
the right, move your hand to the
right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,
or other objects. Avoid jerky or sud-
den maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Turn signals when towing a trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you
may think drivers behind you are
seeing your signals when, in fact,
they are not. It’s important to check
reqularly to be sure the trailer bulbs
are still working.You must also check
the lights every time you disconnect
and then reconnect the wires.
Driving tips
225
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Do not connect a trailer lighting sys-
tem directly to your vehicle’s lighting
system. Use only an approved trailer
wiring harness.
Your Authorized Kia Dealer can
assist you in installing the wiring har-
ness.
Driving on grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
hot and no longer operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 70
km/h (45 mph) to reduce the possi-
bility of engine and transaxle over-
heating.
Operating your vehicle in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer will minimize
heat buildup and extend the life of
your transaxle.
WARNING - Trailer wiring
harness
Failure to use an approved trail-
er wiring harness could result in
damage to the vehicle's electri-
cal system, there by disabling
the brake light system resulting
in an accident.
CAUTION
When towing a trailer on steep
grades especially (in excess of
6%) pay close attention to the
engine coolant temperature
gauge to ensure the engine
does not overheat. If the needle
of the coolant temperature
gauge moves across the dial
towards “H” (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do
so, and allow the engine to idle
until it cools down.You may pro-
ceed once the engine has
cooled sufficiently.
523
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Parking on hills
Generally, you should not park your
vehicle, with a trailer attached, on a
hill. People can be seriously or fatal-
ly injured, and both your vehicle and
the trailer can be damaged if they
begin to move downhill.
However, if you ever have to park
your trailer on a hill, here’s how to do
it:
1. Apply your brakes, but don’t shift
into gear.
2. Have someone place chocks
(blocks of wood or metal intended
for this purpose) under the down-
hill sides of the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in
place, release the brakes until the
chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brakes. Apply your
parking brake, and then shift to R
(Reverse) for a manual transaxle
or P (Park) for an automatic
transaxle.
5. Release the brakes.
When you are ready to leave after
parking on a hill
1. With the manual transaxle in
Neutral or automatic transaxle in P
(Park), apply your brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while you:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly forward until the trail-
er is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
WARNING - Parking brake
It can be dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the parking brake
is not firmly set or if the engine
is still running. In either case
the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be serious-
ly or fatally injured.
WARNING - Parking on a
hill
Parking your vehicle on a hill
with a trailer attached is danger-
ous. It could cause serious
injury or death, should the trail-
er break lose, or should the trail-
er drag the vehicle downhill.
Driving tips
245
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Maintenance when trailer tow-
ing
Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trail-
er. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, auto-
matic transaxle fluid, axle lubricant
and cooling system fluid. Brake con-
dition is another important item to
frequently check. Each item is cov-
ered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If
you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you
start your trip.
Don’t forget to also maintain your
trailer and hitch. Follow the mainte-
nance schedule that accompanied
your trailer and check it periodically.
Preferably, conduct the check at the
start of each day’s driving. Most
importantly, all hitch nuts and bolts
should be tight.
CAUTION
• Due to higher load during
trailer usage, overheating
might occur in hot days or
during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates over-
heating, switch off the A/C and
stop the vehicle in a safe area
to cool down the engine.
• When towing check transaxle
fluid more frequently.
• If your vehicle is not equipped
with the air conditioner, you
should install a condenser fan
for engine performance when
towing a trailer.
525
Driving tips
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LABEL INFORMATION
There are several important labels
and identification numbers located
on your vehicle. The label locations
are identified in the illustrations
shown.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
To check the frame number under the passenger seat, lift the cover.
OLD068001
Frame number
Vehicle certification label (MVSS label)
1LD6001
VIN label
1LDN6003
VIN bar code
1LDN6002
Driving tips
265
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tire specification / pressure
label
Engine number
1LDN6001 OLD066005
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Road warning / 6-2
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS) / 6-3
Overheating / 6-8
Emergency starting / 6-9
Electrical circuit protection / 6-12
Towing / 6-19
If you have a flat tire / 6-24
In case of an emergency
In case of an emergency
26
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exer-
cise extreme caution when
approaching, overtaking, or passing
your vehicle. It should be used when-
ever emergency repairs are being
made or when the vehicle is stopped
near the edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OLD026100
63
In case of an emergency
TIRES PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED)
(1) TPMS Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low Tire Pressure Telltale
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signif-
icantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumina-
tion of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is provided by a
separate telltale, which displays the
symbol "TPMS" when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pres-
sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OLD626200N
In case of an emergency
46
Low tire pressure
telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning telltale is illuminat-
ed, one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-
nering and anticipate increased stop-
ping distances. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible.
Inflate the tires to the proper pres-
sure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pil-
lar outer panel. If you cannot reach a
service station or if the tire cannot
hold the newly added air, replace the
low pressure tire with the temporary
spare tire. Then the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator may turn on and the
Low Tire Pressure telltale may turn
off after restarting and about 20 min-
utes of continuous driving before you
have the low-pressure tire repaired
and replaced on the vehicle.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Low pressure
damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
CAUTION - Changing tem-
peratures
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunction-
ing because the decreased tem-
perature leads to a proportional
lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
65
In case of an emergency
TPMS (Tire pressure
monitoring system)
malfunction telltale
The TPMS malfunction indicator turns
on and stays on when there is a prob-
lem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. If the system is able to cor-
rectly detect an under-inflation warning
at the same time as system failure then
it will illuminate both the TPMS mal-
function and the low tire pressure tell-
tale e. g. if Front Left sensor fails, the
TPMS malfunction indicator turns on,
but if Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear
Right tire is under-inflated, the low tire
pressure telltale may turn on at the
same time as the TPMS malfunction
indicator.
Have the system checked by an
authorized Kia dealer as soon as pos-
sible to determine the cause of the
problem.
✽
NOTICE
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle is
moving around electric power sup-
ply cable or radio transmitter such
as near police stations, government
and public offices, broadcasting sta-
tions, military installations, air-
ports, or transmitting tower, etc.
which can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if some elec-
tronic devices, such as notebook
computers, are used in the vehicle.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
(Continued)
(Continued)
• If there is a failed tire sensor, it is
possible for the TPMS to tem-
porarily learn a replacement sen-
sor if closely driven to another
vehicle that is also equipped with
TPMS. In rare cases, this may
temporarily delay the TPMS mal-
function indicator from turning
on.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TPMS
In case of an emergency
66
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will turn on. Have
the flat tire repaired by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the tempo-
rary spare tire.
✽
NOTICE
NEVER use a puncture-repairing
agent to repair and/or inflate a low
pressure tire. If used, you will have
to replace the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
After you replace the low pressure
tire with the temporary spare tire, the
TPMS malfunction indicator may illu-
minate after restarting and about 20
minutes of continuous driving.
Once the low pressure tire is re-inflat-
ed to the recommended pressure
and installed on the vehicle, the
TPMS malfunction indicator and the
low tire pressure telltale will be soon
extinguished. If the low pressure and
TPMS malfunction indicators are not
extinguished after about 20 minutes
of continuous driving, please visit an
authorized Kia dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low
tire by simply looking at it. Always use
a good quality tire pressure gauge to
measure the tire's inflation pressure.
Please note that a tire that is hot
(from being driven) will have a higher
pressure measurement than a tire
that is cold (from sitting stationary for
at least 3 hours and driven less than
1.6 km (1 mile) during that 3 hour
period). Allow the tire to cool before
measuring the inflation pressure.
Always be sure the tire is cold before
inflating to the recommended pres-
sure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3
hour period.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CAUTION
• Do not use any tire sealant if
your vehicle is equipped with
a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure sen-
sors.
• In order for the system to cor-
rectly monitor tires for under-
inflation, there should be a
total of exactly 4 sensors fit-
ted to each of the four driven
wheel positions. There should
be no other sensors in the
vehicle since this could cause
the system to monitor the
wrong sensors
67
In case of an emergency
This device complies with
Industry Canada Standard RSS-
210. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harm-
ful interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Protecting
TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system's ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure con-
ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions.
WARNING - TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external fac-
tors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually and with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
In case of an emergency
86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OVERHEATING
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss
of power, or if you hear a loud knock-
ing or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated. Should any of
these symptoms occur, use the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. Turn on the hazard warning flash-
er, then drive to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle; set
the automatic transaxle in P
(Park), or shift the manual
transaxle to N (Neutral) and apply
the parking brake.
2. Make sure the air conditioner is
off.
3. If coolant or steam is boiling out of
the radiator, stop the engine and
call an Authorized Kia Dealer for
assistance.
If coolant is not boiling out, allow
the engine to idle and open the
hood to permit the engine to cool
gradually.
If the temperature does not go
down with the engine idling, stop
the engine and allow sufficient
time for it to cool.
4. The coolant level should then be
checked. If the level in the reser-
voir is low, look for leaks at the
radiator hoses and connections,
heater hoses and connections,
radiator, and water pump. If you
find a major leak or another prob-
lem that may have caused the
engine to overheat, do not operate
the engine until it has been cor-
rected. Call an Authorized Kia
Dealer for assistance. If you do not
find a leak or other problem, care-
fully add coolant to the reservoir.
If the engine frequently overheats,
have the cooling system checked
and repaired by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause seri-
ous injury.
69
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures listed on page
6-10. If in doubt, we strongly recom-
mend that you have a competent
technician or towing service jump
start your vehicle.
WARNING - Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery. The bat-
tery produces hydrogen gas
which may explode if exposed
to flame or sparks.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
WARNING
- Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt motor generator set).
In case of an emergency
106
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Connecting jumper cables Jump starting procedure
1. Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles
to touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the previ-
ous illustration. First connect one
end of a jumper cable to the posi-
tive terminal of the discharged bat-
tery (1), then connect the other end
to the positive terminal on the
booster battery (2). Proceed to con-
nect one end of the other jumper
cable to the negative terminal of the
booster battery (3), then the other
end to a solid, stationary, metallic
point (for example, the engine lifting
bracket) away from the battery (4).
Do not connect it to or near any
part that moves when the engine is
cranked. Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal of
the booster battery to the negative
terminal of the discharged battery.
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jumper Cables
Booster battery
OLD046001
Discharged battery
611
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the cor-
rect battery terminals or the cor-
rect ground. Do not lean over the
battery when making connections.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with
the booster battery and let it run at
2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, you should have
your vehicle checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Refer to illustration on page 6-10.
Push-starting
Your manual transaxle-equipped
vehicle should not be push-started
because it might damage the emis-
sion control system.
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transaxle cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
CAUTION
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
In case of an emergency
126
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PROTECTION
Fuses
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has two fuse panels,
one located in the driver's side knee
bolster, the other in the engine com-
partment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and fusible link for high-
er amperage ratings.
1VQA4037
Normal
Normal
Blade type
Cartridge type
Fusible link
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
613
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuse replacement
Driver-side knee bolster
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
on the cover.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
Spare fuses are provided in the
fuse panel in engine compart-
ment.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the audio fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse block in
the engine compartment. If a fuse is
blown, it must be replaced.
1LDA4003 1LDN4022
WARNING - Fuse replace-
ment
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire instead of
the proper fuse - even as a
temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.
• Do not use a screwdriver or
any other metal object to
remove fuses because it may
cause a short circuit and dam-
age the system.
In case of an emergency
146
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Engine compartment
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2. Remove the fuse box cover by
pressing the taps on both ends
and pulling up.
3. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown.
4. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an Authorized
Kia Dealer.
Main fuse
If the ALT (120A) fuse is blown, it
must be removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
2. Remove the screws shown in the
picture above.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
1LDA4005 1LDA4006
CAUTION
After checking the fuse box in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse box
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water leaking
in.
615
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fuse/Relay panel description
Inside the fuse/relay box covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.
Engine compartment
2LDN4008/2LDN4007
Driver-side knee bolster
In case of an emergency
166
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description Fuse rating Protected component
ATM 20A Automatic transaxle control
ECU1 10A Engine control unit
STOP 15A Stop light
F/WIPER 20A Front wiper
R/FOG 10A Rear fog light
F/FOG 15A Front fog light
LO HDLP 15A Headlight (low)
HI HDLP 15A Headlight (high)
A/CON 10A Air conditioner
F/PUMP 15A Fuel pump
T/OPEN 10A Trunk lid opener
FOLD 10A Outside rearview mirror folding
HORN 10A Horn
DEICE 15A Deicer
INJ 15A Injection
SNSR 10A O2 sensor
ECU2 30A Engine control unit
SPARE 10A spare fuse
SPARE 15A spare fuse
SPARE 20A spare fuse
SPARE 30A spare fuse
ABS2 30A Anti-lock brake system
ABS1 30A Anti-lock brake system
IP B+ 50A In panel B+
Description Fuse rating Protected component
BLOWER 30A Blower
IGN2 30A Ignition
IGN1 30A Ignition
RAD 30A Radiator fan
COND 20A Condenser fan
ALT 120A Alternater
ATM - Automatic transaxle control relay
WIPER - Wiper relay
F/FOG - Front fog light relay
LO HDLP - Headlight relay (low)
HI HDLP - Headlight relay (high)
A/CON - Air conditioner relay
F/PUMP - Fuel pump
DRL - Daytime running light relay
COND2 - Condenser fan relay
HORN - Horn relay
MAIN - Main relay
START - Start motor relay
RAD - Radiator fan relay
COND - Condenser fan relay
Engine compartment
617
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Driver-side knee bolster
Description Fuse rating Protected component
START 10A Start motor
SRF/D_LOCK 20A Sunroof, Door lock
HAZARD 10A Hazard warning flasher
A/CON 10A Air conditioner
CLUSTER 10A Cluster
RKE 10A Remote keyless entry
S/HTR 20A Seat warmer
C/LIGHTER 15A Cigar lighter
A/BAG 15A Air bag
R/WIPER 15A Rear wiper
AUDIO 10A Audio
ABS 10A Anti-lock brake system
ACC/PWR 15A Accessory / Power socket
ROOM 15A Room lamp
IGN 10A Ignition
ECU 10A Engine control unit
TAIL RH 10A Tail light (right)
T/SIG 10A Turn signal light
RR/HTR 30A Rear window defroster
P/WDW LH 25A Power window (left)
HTD/MIRR 10A Outside rearview mirror heater
P/WDW RH 25A Power window (right)
TAIL LH 10A Tail light (left)
Description Fuse rating Protected component
RR/HTR - Rear window defroster relay
RESISTOR - Resistor
P/WDW - Power window relay
POWER - Accessory / Power socket relay
TAIL - Tail light relay
In case of an emergency
186
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Memory fuse
Your vehicle is equipped with a mem-
ory fuse to prevent battery discharge
if your vehicle is parked without
being operated for prolonged peri-
ods. Use the following procedures
before parking the vehicle for pro-
longed period.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights.
3. Open the driver-side knee bolster
cover and pull up the “ROOM
15A”.
✽
NOTICE
• If the memory fuse is pulled up
from the fuse panel, the warning
chime, audio, clock and intetrior
lamps, etc., will not operate. Some
items must be reset after replace-
ment. (Refer to “Items to be
reset···.” on page 7-26)
• Even though the memory fuse is
pulled up, the battery can still be
discharged by operation of the
headlights or other electrical
devices.
1LDA4004
Memory fuse
619
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TOWING
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting
and towing procedures are neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehi-
cle. The use of wheel dollies or
flatbed is recommended.
For trailer towing guidelines informa-
tion, refer to section 5 “Driving Tips”.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
2GHA4107
1LDN4023
2LDA4001
2LDA4002
CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle back-
wards with the front wheels on
the ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
In case of an emergency
206
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3. Release the parking brake.
Tie-down hook
(for flatbed towing)
Towing with a vehicle other
than a tow truck
If towing is necessary, we recom-
mend you to have it done by an
Authorized Kia dealer or a commer-
cial tow truck service.
OLD046019
Tie-down hook
CAUTION
Failure to place the transaxle
shift lever in N (Neutral) may
cause internal damage to the
transaxle.
WARNING
Do not use the hooks under the
front of the vehicle for towing
purposes. These hooks are
designed ONLY for transport tie-
down. If the tie-down hooks are
used for towing, the tie-down
hooks will be damaged and this
could lead to serious injury.
OLD046020
• Front
OLD046021
• Rear
621
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front or rear of the
vehicle. Use extreme caution when
towing the vehicle. A driver must be
in the vehicle to steer it and operate
the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
CAUTION
• Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
In case of an emergency
226
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
When your vehicle is being
towed by another vehicle
other than a tow truck (In case
of an emergency)
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so
the steering wheel isn’t locked.
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking bake.
• Vehicle equipped with automatic
transaxles should not exceed 45
km/h (28 mph) and should not be
towed more than 80 km (50 miles).
• Vehicle equipped with manual
transmissions should not be towed
in excess of 88 km/h (55 mph) and
should not be towed more than
645 km (400 miles).
1LDA4024
WARNING
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing
hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing
cable or chain may break and
cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the towing vehicle can hard-
ly move, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
Authorized Kia dealer or a
commercial tow truck service
for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
623
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle
The following methods are effective
when your vehicle is stuck in mud,
sand or similar substances that pre-
vent the vehicle from being driven
out under its own power.
• Remove the soil and sand, etc.
from the front and the back of the
tires.
• Place a stone or wood under the
tires.
CAUTION
To prevent internal damage to
the transaxle, never tow your
vehicle from the rear (back-
wards) with all four tires in con-
tact with the surface.
In case of an emergency
246
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
The spare tire, jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in
the trunk compartment. Move the
carpeting out of the way to reach this
equipment.
Removing the spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of compact
spare tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
1LDN4009 1LDA4010
CAUTION - Compact
spare
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare
should be replaced by the
proper conventional tire and
rim at the first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle
is not recommended with
more than one compact spare
tire in use at the same time.
625
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi).
✽
NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash.
• This tire should not be installed on
the front axle if the vehicle must be
driven in snow or on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
CAUTION - Compact
spare
This spare tire should be used
only for VERY short distances.
Compact spares should NEVER
be used for long drives or
extended distances.
In case of an emergency
266
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Changing tires
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
WARNING - Changing
tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground
whenever possible. If you can-
not find a firm, level place off
the road, call a towing service
company for assistance.
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious
injury or death. No person
should place any portion of
their body under a vehicle that
is supported only by a jack.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
627
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tire replacement
1. Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2. Shift the shift lever into R
(Reverse) with manual transaxle
or P (Park) with automatic
transaxle.
3. Activate the hazard warning flash-
er.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
WARNING -
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully, and
always block the wheel diago-
nally opposite the wheel being
changed.
• It is recommended that the
wheels of the vehicle be
chocked, and that no person
should remain in a vehicle that
is being jacked.
1JBA6021
1JBA6504
In case of an emergency
286
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-
terclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any nut until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
7. Place the jack at the front or rear
jacking position closest to the tire
you are changing. Place the jack
at the designated locations under
the frame. The jacking positions
are plates welded to the frame
with two tabs and a raised dot to
index with the jack.
8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 30 mm (1.2 in).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
9. Remove the wheel lug nuts by
turning them counterclockwise,
then remove the wheel.
10. Mount the spare tire into position
and install the wheel lug nuts
with the beveled edge inward.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
1LDN4016
1LDA4015
OLD046014
629
In case of an emergency
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11. Once the wheel lug nuts have
been tightened, lower the vehicle
fully to the ground and continue to
tighten the lug nuts until they are
fully secured. Tighten the wheel
lug nuts firmly in a “X” pattern.
If you are unsure of the tightness
of the wheel lug nuts, have them
checked at the nearest service
station. The specified tightening
torque is 9~11 kg•m (65-79 lb•ft,
88-107 N•m). Improperly tight-
ened wheel lug nuts could cause
brake pedal vibration while brak-
ing.
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel bolts and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts
removed are reinstalled - or, if
replaced, that nuts with metric
threads and the same chamfer
configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric bolt or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the bolt so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Wheel bolts
If the bolts are damaged or if
non-metric nut is used on a met-
ric bolts or vice versa, they may
lose their ability to retain the
wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel resulting in
severe injury or death.
WARNING
Check the inflation pressures as
soon as possible after installing
the spare tire. Adjust it to the
specified pressure, if necessary.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
OLD046018
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Maintenance services / 7-2
Maintenance schedule / 7-3
Owner maintenance / 7-7
Engine compartment / 7-10
Engine oil and oil filter / 7-11
Engine cooling system / 7-12
Brakes and clutch / 7-15
Parking brake / 7-16
Power steering / 7-17
Manual transaxle / 7-18
Automatic transaxle / 7-18
Lubricants and fluids / 7-20
Air cleaner / 7-21
Climate control air filter / 7-22
Wiper blades / 7-23
Battery / 7-25
Tires and wheels / 7-28
Exterior care / 7-40
Interior care / 7-44
Maintenance
Maintenance
27
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an Authorized
Kia Dealer perform this work.
An Authorized Kia Dealer has facto-
ry-trained technicians and genuine
Kia parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and qual-
ity service, see an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽
NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your Kia warranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Warranty & Consumer
Information manual.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
Authorized Kia Dealer. An Authorized
Kia Dealer meets Kia`s high service
quality standards and receives tech-
nical support from Kia in order to pro-
vide you with a high level of service
satisfaction.
73
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first
× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128
# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64
Engine oil & engine oil filter (1)
Drive belts (tension) I I I I
Cooling system hoses & connections I I I I I
Engine coolant (1) I I I I I R IIIIIRIIII
Fuel filter RR
Fuel tank cap, lines, EVAP canister and hoses
II
Fuel tank air filter I R I R I
Air cleaner filter (2) I I I I I R IIIIIRIIII
Ignition wires I I
Spark plugs
Platinum coated R
Iridium coated
Idle speed I I I I I
Valve clearance (if equipped) I
Engine timing belt R
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Engine control system
Replace every 6,000 km or 6 months.
Replace every 160,000 km
Maintenance
47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)
Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first
× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128
# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64
Air conditioner compressor operation &
IIIII
refrigerant amount (if equipped)
Exhaust pipes, heat shield & mountings I I IIIIII
Front suspension ball joints I I I I
Brakes/clutch fluid (1) I I I I I I I R IIIIIIIR
Front brake pads & discs (3) I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
Rear brake pads & discs/drums (3) I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
Parking brake I I I IIIII
Brake lines & connections
IIIII
(including booster)
Manual transaxle oil (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R
Clutch & brake pedal free play I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Chassis and body
75
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONTINUED)
Kilometers or time in months, whichever comes first
× 1,000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128
# Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64
Automatic transaxle fluid (1) I I I R I I I R I I I R I I I R
Chassis & underbody bolts & nuts I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
Tire condition & inflation pressure I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
Wheel alignment (4)
Tire rotation
Steering operation & linkage I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
Power steering fluid & lines I I I IIIII
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I
Seat belts, buckles & anchors I I I I I I IIIIIIIIII
Lock, hinges & hood latch L L L L L L LLLLLLLLLL
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
ITEM
Inspect when abnormal condition noted
Rotate the tires every 12,000 km
Chassis and body (Continued)
Maintenance
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Chart symbols:
I- Inspect these items and their related parts. If necessary, correct, clean, refill, adjust or replace.
R- Replace or change.
L- Lubricate.
(1) Refer to the lubricant and coolant specifications in the Owner’s Manual.
(2) More frequent maintenance is required if driving under dusty conditions.
(3) More frequent maintenance is required if the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions:
a. Short-distance driving.
b. Driving on dusty roads.
c. Extensive idling or slow-speed driving in stop-and-go traffic.
(4) If necessary, rotate and balance the wheels.
* Note: Check the engine oil and coolant levels every week.
77
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Owner maintenance schedule
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an
Authorized Kia Dealer at the fre-
quencies indicated to help ensure
safe, dependable operation of your
vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for strange sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system after use is
normal).
WARNING - Radiation
coolant
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow out
under pressure. This could
cause serious injury.
Maintenance
87
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall) :
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or da-
mage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year :
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
79
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an Authorized Kia Dealer with
special tools.
✽
NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Kia Warranty &
Consumer Information Manual pro-
vided with the vehicle. If you're
unsure about any servicing or main-
tenance procedure, have it done by
an Authorized Kia Dealer.
WARNING - Maintenance
work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be danger-
ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing some
maintenance procedures.If
you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is danger-
ous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury. Therefore, if you must
run the engine while working
under the hood, make certain
that you remove all jewelry
(especially rings, bracelets,
watches, and necklaces) and
all neckties, scarves, and sim-
ilar loose clothing before get-
ting near the engine or cool-
ing fans.
Maintenance
107
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
OLD058002
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick
(if equipped)
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Engine coolant reservoir
12. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
711
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
Checking the engine oil level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended Lubricants”
in section 8.)
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
8LDN5003OHD076004R
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if left
in contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Used
engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in lab-
oratory animals.Always protect
your skin by washing your
hands thoroughly with soap and
warm water as soon as possible
after handling used oil.
Maintenance
127
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
WARNING - Removing
radiator cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Even then,
use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap.
Wrap a thick towel around it,
and turn it counterclockwise
slowly to the first stop. Step
back while the pressure is
released from the cooling sys-
tem. When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radi-
ator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and steam
may still blow out under pres-
sure, causing serious injury.
713
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant to provide protec-
tion against freezing and corrosion.
Bring the level to F, but do not over-
fill. If frequent additions are required,
see an Authorized Kia Dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• Use only soft (de-mineralized)
water in the coolant mixture.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
OLD056008
Full
OK
Low
-15°C (5°F) 35 65
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Coolant
Solution
Water
Maintenance
147
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized Kia dealer according to the
Maintenance Schedule at the begin-
ning of this section.
OLD057007N
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure. This could cause seri-
ous injury.
CAUTION
Put a thick cloth or fabric
around the radiator cap before
refilling the coolant in order to
prevent the coolant from over-
flowing into engine parts such
as generator.
715
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BRAKES AND CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED)
Checking brake/clutch fluid
level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake/clutch fluid, clean
the area around the reservoir cap
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch
fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
Use only the specified brake/clutch
fluid. (Refer to “Recommended
Lubricants” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
WARNING
When changing and adding
brake/clutch fluid, handle it
carefully. Do not let it come in
contact with your eyes.If
brake/clutch fluid should come
in contact with your eyes, imme-
diately flush them with a large
quantity of fresh tap water. Have
your eyes examined by a doctor
as soon as possible.
WARNING
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of
fluid, the vehicle should be
inspected by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
1LDA5020
Maintenance
167
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Checking the parking brake
Check the stroke of the parking
brake by counting the number of
“clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
from the released position. Also, the
parking brake alone should securely
hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
grade. If the stroke is more or less
than specified, have the parking
brake adjusted by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
Stroke : 7~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 20 kg
(44 lbs, 196 N).
CAUTION
Do not allow brake/clutch fluid
to contact the vehicle's body
paint, as paint damage will
result. Brake/clutch fluid, which
has been exposed to open air
for an extended time should
never be used as its quality can-
not be guaranteed. It should be
thrown out. Don't put in the
wrong kind of fluid. For exam-
ple, just a few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake clutch system can
damage brake clutch system
parts.
OLD036030
PARKING BRAKE
717
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
POWER STEERING
Checking the power steering
fluid level
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the side of the reser-
voir at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steer-
ing fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
In the event the power steering sys-
tem requires frequent addition of
fluid, the vehicle should be inspected
by an Authorized Kia Dealer.
Use only the specified power steer-
ing fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
Lubricants" in section 8.)
Power steering hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
severe damage and the twists in the
power steering hose before driving.
1LDA5018
CAUTION
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate
the vehicle for prolonged peri-
ods with a low power steering
fluid level.
• Never start the engine when
the reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful
that dirt does not get into the
tank.
• Too little fluid can make the
steering wheel heavier or
strange noise can be generat-
ed.
• The use of the non-specified
fluid could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the power steering
wheel and cause damage to it.
Maintenance
187
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Changing the manual
transaxle fluid
Have manual transaxle fluid checked
and changed by an authorized Kia
dealer according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
section.
Checking the automatic
transaxle fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level
should be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground
with the parking brake applied and
check the fluid level according to the
following procedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N
(Neutral) position and confirm the
engine is running at normal idle
speed.
2. After the transaxle is warmed up
sufficiently (fluid temperature
70~80 °C (158~176 °F)), for exam-
ple by 10 minutes usual driving,
shift the selector lever through all
positions then place the selector
lever in N (Neutral) or P (Park)
position.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
(IF EQUIPPED)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
(IF EQUIPPED)
1LDA5008
719
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in
“HOT” range on the level gauge. If
the fluid level is lower, add the
specified fluid from the fill hole. If
the fluid level is higher, drain the
fluid from the drain hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold
condition (fluid temperature 20~
30 °C (68~86 °F) add the fluid to
“COLD (C)” line and then recheck
the fluid level according to the
above step 2.
✽
NOTICE
“COLD (C)” scale is for reference
only and should NOT be used to
determine transaxle fluid level.
✽
NOTICE
New automatic transaxle fluid
should be red. The red dye is added
so the assembly plant can identify it
as automatic transaxle fluid and dis-
tinguish it from engine oil or
antifreeze. The red dye, which is not
an indicator of fluid quality, is not
permanent. As the vehicle is driven,
the automatic transaxle fluid will
begin to look darker. The color may
eventually appear light brown.
Therefore, have an Authorized Kia
dealer change the automatic
transaxle fluid according to the
Scheduled Maintenance at the
beginning of this section.
Changing the automatic
transaxle fluid
Have automatic transaxle fluid
changed by an authorized Kia dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
section.
CAUTION
• Low fluid level causes
transaxle slippage. Overfilling
can cause foaming, loss of fluid
and transaxle malfunction.
• The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transaxle mal-
function and failure.
WARNING - Parking brake
To avoid sudden movement of
the vehicle, apply parking brake
and depress the brake pedal
before moving the shift lever.
OHD076045N
WARNING - Transaxle
fluid
The transaxle fluid level should
be checked when the engine is at
normal operating temperature.
This means that the engine, radi-
ator, radiator hose and exhaust
system etc., are very hot.
Exercise great care not to burn
yourself during this procedure.
Maintenance
207
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
Body lubrication
All moving points of the body, such
as door hinges, hood hinges, and
locks, should be lubricated each time
the engine oil is changed. Use a non-
freezing lubricant on locks during
cold weather.
Make sure the engine hood second-
ary latch keeps the hood from open-
ing when the primary latch is
released.
1LDA5021
WARNING
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
it's occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and ani-
mals. Do not drink and avoid
contacting windshield washer
fluid. Serious injury or death
could occur.
721
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
AIR CLEANER
Element cleaning
This element may be air cleaned or
replaced, depending on its condition.
Unless it is very dirty, merely shake it
to remove foreign particles. Each
time this filter is inspected, wipe the
inside of the air cleaner housing and
cover with a damp cloth. If the vehi-
cle is operated in extremely dusty or
sandy areas, clean or replace this
element more often than at the usual
recommended intervals.
1LDA5010
CAUTION
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• Driving without an air cleaner
encourages backfiring, which
could cause a fire in the
engine compartment.
Maintenance
227
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust
or other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system.
If dust or other pollutants accumulate
in the filter over a period of time, the
air flow from the air vents may
decrease, resulting in moisture accu-
mulation on the inside of the wind-
shield even when the outside (fresh)
are position is selected. If this hap-
pens, have the climate control air fil-
ter replaced by an Authorized Kia
Dealer.
The climate control air filter should
be replaced every 15,000 km. If the
vehicle is operated in the severely
air-polluted cities or on dusty rough
roads for a long periods, it should be
inspected more frequently and
replaced earlier.
1LDA5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
723
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WIPER BLADES
Wiper blade maintenance
✽
NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Windshield wiper blade
replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
1LDA5022
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gas oline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components,do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
Maintenance
247
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the
wiper blade assembly to expose
the plastic locking clip.
2. Compress the clip and slide the
blade assembly downward.
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
1LDA5023
1LDA5024 1LDA5025
CAUTION
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield.
725
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
BATTERY
WARNING - Battery
dangers
Always read the follow-
ing instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, which is a
highly combustible gas,
is always present in bat-
tery cells and may
explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to con-
tact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush your
eyes with clean water for
at least 15 minutes and
get immediate medical
attention. If possible,
continue to apply water
with a sponge or cloth
until medical attention is
received.
If electrolyte gets on
your skin, thoroughly
wash the contacted area.
If you feel a pain or a
burning sensation, get
medical attention imme-
diately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure on
the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in person-
al injury. Lift with a battery car-
rier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to charge the
battery when the battery cables
are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage. Never
touch these components with
the engine running or the igni-
tion switched on.
Maintenance
267
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
For best battery service :
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
Battery recharging
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
Items to be reset after the battery
has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Clock (See section 3)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Audio (See section 3)
• Sunroof (See section 3)
1LDE5028
727
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
WARNING - Recharging
battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the bat-
tery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 49 °C (120 °F).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
(Continued)
(Continued)
•Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery ter-
minal.
CAUTION
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
Maintenance
287
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked every day
when the tires are cold. “Cold Tires”
means the vehicle has not been driv-
en for at least three hours or driven
less than 1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the vehicle.
1LDN6001
WARNING - Tire underin-
flation
Severe underinflation (70 kPa
(10 psi) or more) can lead to
severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for protracted periods at high
speeds.
CAUTION
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an
Authorized Kia Dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread, and
a greater possibility of dam-
age from road hazards.
729
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
WARNING - Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and lead
to sudden tire failure. This could
result in loss of vehicle control
and potential injury.
CAUTION - Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than 1.6 km (one
mile) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly
worn, or if your tires have
been damaged, replace them.
CAUTION
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6
psi). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
Maintenance
307
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the cen-
ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire
pressure with the tire gage. Be sure
to put the valve caps back on the
valve stems. They help prevent leaks
by keeping out dirt and moisture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to Section 8, Specifications.
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
Rotate radial tires that have an
asymmetric tread pattern only
from front to rear and not from
right to left.
CBGQ0707
CBGQ0707A
Do not include compact spare tire in rotation.
Directional tires (if equipped)
WARNING
• Do not use the temporary
spare tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
731
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
1LDA5026
Tread wear indicator
WARNING - Replacing
tires
• Driving on worn-out tires is
very hazardous and will
reduce braking effectiveness,
steering accuracy, and trac-
tion.
• Your vehicle is equipped with
tires designed to provide for
safe ride and handling capa-
bility. Do not use a size and
type of tire and wheel that is
different from the one that is
originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety
and performance of your vehi-
cle, which could lead to han-
dling failure or rollover and
serious injury. When replacing
the tires, be sure to equip all
four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type,
tread, brand and load-carrying
capacity.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• The use of any other tire size
or type may seriously affect
ride, handling, ground clear-
ance, stopping distance, body
to tire clearance, snow tire
clearance, and speedometer
reliability.
• It is best to replace all four
tires at the same time. If that is
not possible, or necessary,
then replace the two front or
two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling.
Maintenance
327
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Compact spare tire replace-
ment (if equipped)
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new Kia and should be mounted on
the same compact spare tire wheel.
The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel alignment and tire
balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
WARNING
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling char-
acteristics, ground clearance,
body-to-tire clearance, snow
chain clearance, speedometer
calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
CAUTION
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
minum wheels.Use only
approved wheel weights.
733
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignement.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possiblity of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P195/60R15 87H
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however, not
all tires have this marking).
195 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
Maintenance
347
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
87 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
6.0JX15
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
15 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger cars. The speed
rating is part of the tire size designa-
tion on the sidewall of the tire. This
symbol corresponds to that tire's
designed maximum safe operating
speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years, based
on the manufacturing date, tire
strength and performance, decline
with age naturally (even unused
spare tires). Therefore, the tires
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1606 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2006.
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
735
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
4. Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
The following information relates to
the tire grading system developed by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (CMVSS) for grading tires
by tread wear, traction and tempera-
ture performance.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use. However, performance
may differ from the norm because of
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicles
may vary with respect to grade.
WARNING
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden tire
failure, which could lead to a
loss of control and an accident
involving serious injury or death.
Maintenance
367
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. The
grades represent the tires ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C. The grades repre-
sent the tire’s resistance to the gen-
eration of heat and its ability to dissi-
pate heat when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tires to
degenerate and reduce tires life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tires failure. Grades A and B
represent higher levels of perform-
ance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by the law.
Tire terminology and defini-
tions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmis-
sion, power seats, and air condition-
ing.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
WARNING - Tire
temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
737
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 68 kg
(150 pounds).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Maintenance
387
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs.) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due to
curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
That load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and driving by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
739
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
if you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions. Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4
psi) more air pressure than the pres-
sure recommended for the standard
tires on the tire label on the driver's
side of the center pillar, or up to the
maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75
mph) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Maintenance
407
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EXTERIOR CARE
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
✽
NOTICE
Do not use strong soap, chemical
detergents or hot water, and do not
wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle is
warm.
CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them and
cause a short which can lead
to a fire.
OJB037800
741
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Waxing
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽
NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
Maintenance
427
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
743
Maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum wheels.
They may scratch or damage the
finish.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any acid detergent. It
may damage and corrode the alu-
minum wheels coated with a clear
protective finish.
Maintenance
447
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
INTERIOR CARE
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil from con-
tacting the dashboard because they
may cause damage or discoloration.
If they do contact the dashboard,
wipe them off immediately. See the
instructions that follow for the proper
way to clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
CAUTION
Using anything but recommend-
ed cleaners and procedures
may affect the fabric’s appear-
ance and fire-resistant proper-
ties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Specifications / 8-2
Specifications
Specifications
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Item 4 Door 5 Door
Overall length 4,500 (177.2)/4,510 (177,5)*
1
4,350 (171.3)
Overall width 1,735 (68.3) 1,735 (68.3)
Overall height 1,470 (57.9) 1,470 (57.9)
Front tread 1,495 (58.9) 1,495 (58.9)
Rear tread 1,485 (58.5) 1,485 (58.5)
Wheelbase 2,610 (102.8) 2,610 (102.8)
SPECIFICATIONS
The specifications given here are for general information only. Although this information was accurate at the time of
printing, Kia reserves the right to change its vehicles or their specifications without notice. Please check with an
authorized Kia dealer for more precise and more up-to-date information.
mm (in)
Item Inflation Pressure
Wheel lug nut torque
Tire Wheel kPa (psi) kg·m (lb·ft, N·m)
P195/60R15 6.0J x 15 210 (30)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
P205/50R16 6.0J x 16 210 (30)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
Compact spare tire
T125/70D15 420 (60)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)
Tires
Dimensions
*
1
: Sporty pack only
83
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Specifications
Light Bulb Wattage
Headlights (Low/High) 55/60
Front turn signal lights 27
Position lights 5
Front fog lights* 27
Stop and tail lights 27/8
Rear turn signal lights 27
Back-up lights 17
Rear side mark light 5
High mounted stop light* 27 or LED
License plate lights 5
Front map lamp 10
Center dome lamp 10
Trunk room lamp 5
Light bulbs
* : if equipped
Specifications
48
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel nec-
essary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and
energy savings.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil
*1 *2
4.0 l (4.23 US qt.)
(drain and refill)
Manual transaxle fluid 2.0 l (2.11 US qt.)
Automatic transaxle fluid 6.6 l (6.97 US qt.) DIAMOND ATF SP-III
Power steering fluid 0.8 l (0.85 US qt.)
Coolant 6.6 l (6.97 US qt.)
Brake/Clutch fluid
0.7~0.8 l
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
Fuel 53 l (14 US gal.) -
API Service SJ, SL or above,
ILSAC GF-3 or above
API Service GL-4 (SAE 75W-85, fill for-life)
PSF-III
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
MIXTURE, Antifreeze with water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
85
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Specifications
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
✽
NOTICE
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug,
or dipstick before checking or drain-
ing any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine
and other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-
20,5W-30 (API SJ, SL / ILSAC GF-3). However, if the engine oil is not available in your coun-
try, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (starting and oil flow). Lower viscosity engine oils can pro-
vide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher vis-
cosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather.
Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in
engine damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be
operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Index
Index
29
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Air bag - Advanced supplemental restraint system..3-50
Air cleaner....................................................................7-21
Antenna ........................................................................3-98
Audio system................................................................3-99
Automatic transaxle.............................................4-6, 7-18
Battery ..........................................................................7-25
Before driving ................................................................5-5
Brake system ................................................................4-11
Brakes and clutch........................................................7-15
Climate control air filter.............................................7-22
Cruise control ..............................................................4-21
Defroster.......................................................................4-45
Door locks ......................................................................3-8
Electrical circuit protection........................................6-12
Emergency starting .......................................................6-9
Emission control system ...............................................5-3
Engine compartment ...........................................2-4, 7-10
Engine cooling system.................................................7-12
Engine oil and oil filter ...............................................7-11
Exterior care ................................................................7-40
Fuel filler lid ................................................................3-80
Fuel requirements .........................................................5-2
Gauges ..........................................................................4-29
Hazard warning flasher..............................................4-46
Hood..............................................................................3-78
How to use this manual ................................................1-2
If you have a flat tire...................................................6-24
Ignition switch ...............................................................4-2
Immobilizer system .......................................................3-6
Instrument cluster.......................................................4-28
Instrument panel overview...........................................2-3
Interior care .................................................................7-44
Interior features...........................................................3-90
Interior lights ...............................................................3-87
Interior overview ...........................................................2-2
A
B
C
D
E
G
F
H
I
93
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Index
Keys ................................................................................3-2
Label information........................................................5-25
Lighting ........................................................................4-39
Lubricants and fluids..................................................7-20
Luggage net..................................................................3-97
Maintenance schedule...................................................7-3
Maintenance services ....................................................7-2
Manual climate control system ..................................4-47
Manual transaxle .................................................4-5, 7-18
Mirrors .........................................................................3-83
Overheating....................................................................6-8
Owner maintenance ......................................................7-7
Parking brake ..............................................................7-16
Power steering .............................................................7-17
Remote keyless entry ....................................................3-3
Road warning ................................................................6-2
Safety belts ...................................................................3-27
Seat................................................................................3-16
Special driving conditions ............................................5-7
Specifications .................................................................8-2
Starting the engine ........................................................4-4
Steering wheel ..............................................................4-18
Storage compartment..................................................3-88
Suggestions for economical operation.........................5-6
Sunroof .........................................................................3-94
Tires and wheels ..........................................................7-28
Tires pressure monitoring system (TPMS).................6-3
Towing ..........................................................................6-19
Traction control system ..............................................4-25
Trailer towing ..............................................................5-17
Trunk ............................................................................3-76
Vehicle break-in process ...............................................1-3
Vehicle load limit .........................................................5-11
K
L
M
O
P
R
S
T
V
Index
49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Warnings and indicators ............................................4-31
Weight of the vehicle...................................................5-16
Windows.......................................................................3-13
Windshield defrosting and defogging........................4-56
Wiper blades ................................................................7-23
Wipers and washers ....................................................4-43
W
